all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
Network manual | Users Manual | 2.30 MiB | / July 03 2002 | |||
1 |
|
manual insert | Users Manual | 68.50 KiB | / July 03 2002 | |||
1 |
|
manual1 | Users Manual | 2.35 MiB | / July 03 2002 | |||
1 |
|
manual2 | Users Manual | 1.71 MiB | / July 03 2002 | |||
1 |
|
manual3 | Users Manual | 1.68 MiB | / July 03 2002 | |||
1 |
|
manual4 | Users Manual | 1.57 MiB | / July 03 2002 | |||
1 |
|
manual5 | Users Manual | 571.50 KiB | / July 03 2002 | |||
1 | External Photos | July 03 2002 | ||||||
1 | Internal Photos | July 03 2002 | ||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | July 03 2002 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | July 03 2002 | ||||||
1 | RF Exposure Info | November 03 2002 / July 03 2002 | ||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | July 03 2002 |
1 | Network manual | Users Manual | 2.30 MiB | / July 03 2002 |
3-074-603-11 (1) Network Function Operating Instructions Registration code (for a detailed explanation of this cord, see page 28.) 2002 Sony Corporation DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US On trademarks ImageStation is the registered trademark of Sony Corporation. Memory Stick and The BLUETOOTH trademarks are owned by their proprietor and used by Sony are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation. Corporation under license. NetFront by Access Co., Ltd. is adopted for the Internet function of this product. NetFront is a registered trademark of Access Co., Ltd in Japan. Copyright 1996 2001 ACCESS CO., LTD. Portions of the supplied software are based partially on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, and are not mentioned in each case in this manual. No compensation for your recordings Any recording contents or downloaded files cannot be compensated for being lost due to redording/playback malfunction or storage media problems. Precautions Before using the network function, make sure to set the clock on the camcorder. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the camcorder. If you use the network function without setting the clock, you may not be able to send/receive email, or view a web page. Do not remove the battery pack or disconnect the AC power adaptor while operating in NETWORK mode. The setup for the NETWORK mode may be lost. Also, exit the NETWORK mode when setting the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or switching the mode. These are to prevent the NETWORK mode setup from being lost. It is recommended that you make backup copies of your email messages and your network preferences. These may be lost from time to time due to memory corruption. To save the network preferences, write them down on paper, or use Setup memo, described (p. 108). Also, this data may be lost when the camcorder is repaired by services. The network function with this product is available only in the U.S. The reset button cannot reset the network preferences. Note on network operation when using the battery pack When the remaining battery time is insufficient in NETWORK mode, use the AC power adaptor or replace the battery pack with a fully charged battery pack. Before connecting the AC power adaptor or replacing the battery pack, be sure to exit the NETWORK mode. 2 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Table of contents Introduction The network function on the camcorder ... 4 Basic operations in the NETWORK mode
.................................................................. 6 How to use the Network Menu .......... 6 How to hold your camcorder when operating in the NETWORK mode ................................................ 7 How to use the stylus .......................... 8 How to input characters ...................... 9 Character input display ..................... 11 The available characters list .............. 12 Character input setting ...................... 17 Preparation Using the NETWORK functions .............. 18 Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology ............................................ 19 Registering a Bluetooth device ......... 20 Using your Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function ...................... 20 When the registration has failed ...... 24 Displaying information on your camcorder ..................................... 24 Radio wave indication ....................... 26 Selecting other Bluetooth devices from the list .................................. 26 Deleting a registered Bluetooth device from the list ...................... 26 Customer registration ................................ 28 DI customer registration .................... 28 Online registration using your PC ... 28 Online registration with your camcorder ..................................... 28 Registering your album on the Web ........ 31 Internet service provider ........................... 32 Registering with So-net ......................... 33 Setting network preferences ..................... 34 Entering your DI customer ID and password ...................................... 34 Setting your provider preferences ... 36 Using email .................................................. 58 Sending email ...................................... 58 Using the address book ..................... 69 Receiving email ................................... 75 Deleting unnecessary email .............. 80 Viewing web pages .................................... 82 Viewing web pages ............................ 82 How to use the menu bar on the browser ......................................... 84 Storing the web page into a Memory Stick Page Memo ................................ 90 Shutting down the browser .............. 95 Additional Information File storage destinations and file names
................................................................ 96 Troubleshooting .......................................... 97 Trouble accessing the Internet .......... 97 Trouble with email ............................. 98 Trouble viewing web pages .............. 99 Troubles about the album on the Web .............................................. 100 Adjusting the LCD screen
(CALIBRATION) ....................... 100 Specifications ............................................. 101 Messages .................................................... 102 General ............................................... 102 Album on the Web ........................... 103 Email ................................................... 103 Browser .............................................. 104 Album error codes .................................... 105 Glossary ..................................................... 106 Setup memo ............................................... 108 Network Operation Making your album on the Web .............. 45 Uploading images to your album on the Web .................................... 45 Viewing or editing your album on the Web .................................... 52 Deleting images from your album ... 57 Finishing viewing or editing the album ............................................ 57 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US I n t r o d u c t i o n 3 Introduction The network function on the camcorder Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Handycam. This Handycam can access to the Internet through your provider using a dial-up networking connection with a Bluetooth device. You can view web pages, receive email, and send email with images recorded on your camcorder attached. Customer registration allows you to use the So-
net option for setting network preferences easily, as well as an album on the Web, your own private Internet-based photo album. The album on the Web uses the ImageStation function. The communication system is Bluetooth Ver.1.1 and its compatible Bluetooth profiles are the Generic Access Profile and the Dial-up Networking Profiles. Easy access to the Internet You can view a web page via the Internet. Send/receive your emails You can send or receive email anytime, and attach images to email messages. 4 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US The network function on the camcorder Making your album on the Web You can upload images to your album, and view or edit your album. Easy network preferences (So-net) Using the So-net option, you can easily set the required Internet and email preferences. For details on So-net, see Using the recommended provider (So-net)
(p. 32), or the supplied flyer Getting Online with your Sony Network Handycam camcorder. Set the camcorders clock setting before using the Network functions. (The default setting is OFF.) If you do not set the clock setting, you cannot send and receive emails or view web pages. You also have to set up your camcorder and the peripheral device, and complete required registrations (DI customer registration, etc.). For more information, see the supplied flyer Getting Online with your Sony Network Handycam camcorder. DI in DI customer ID stands for Digital Imaging. I n t r o d u c t i o n 5 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode This section describes basic control ways to operate your camcorder, those which are used for network operations. How to use the Network Menu To access the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder.
[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]
[a]: Send and receive email. For details, see Using email (p. 58).
[b]: View a web page through the Internet. For details, see Viewing web pages
(p. 82).
[c]: You have to make various settings using this menu before using the network function. For details, see Setting network preferences (p. 34).
[d]: Exit the NETWORK mode.
[e]: Upload images to your album on the Web and post the images on the Internet. For details, see Making your album on the Web (p. 45). The actual screens may differ slightly from the illustrations in this network function operating instructions. 6 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode How to hold your camcorder when operating in the NETWORK mode When operating in the NETWORK mode, you can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder with the LCD screen facing over to use the stylus (for touch panel operation, supplied). 1 Turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder with the LCD screen facing over. I n t r o d u c t i o n 2 Hold your camcorder as illustrated below. The way to hold and operate your camcorder varies depending on the model. For detail, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with your camcorder. 7 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode How to use the stylus The buttons required for operating your camcorder are displayed on the LCD screen. Operate by pressing the buttons on the screen directly but lightly with the stylus provided. In this manual, pressing the buttons in this way using the stylus is referred to as tapping. Tap the desired button on the screen with the stylus. The selected button turns orange.
, Notes Do not tap them with sharp-pointed objects other than the stylus supplied. Do not tap the LCD screen too hard. Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands. When the LCD screen gets dirty, use the supplied cleaning cloth. You cannot drag icons, like on a computer, by touching and sliding across your camcorder screen with the stylus. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder for the stylus storage location. To avoid losing the stylus, we recommend that you return it to the storage location after use. 8 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode How to input characters You have to frequently enter characters, such as email addresses, or web pages addresses (URL), to use the network function. This section describes how to input characters. 1
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder. I n t r o d u c t i o n
(2) Tap [
Mail]. The Send screen appears.
(3) Tap [To].
,
,
(4) Tap [
New]. The character input screen appears.
, 9 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode 2 Selecting the character type Tap [abcy123], then tap the desired character type. abc: When inputting alphabetical characters. 123: When inputting numerical characters. When you selected abc When you selected 123 3 Inputting characters
(1) Tap the character you want to input.
(2) After you input the characters, tap [Enter]. The screen which is displayed before you display the character input screen appears. 10 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode Character input display 1 2 6 7 3 4 5 9 8 1 [a/A] button
[a/A] button is displayed when you input alphabetical characters. You can switch between upper case and lower case. 2 [abcy123] button A list box appears when you tap the [abcy123] button. Tap the desired type of letter from the list box. 3 Input byte number/maximum byte number 4 Preferences You can change the keyboard type for alphabet input. 5 Text area You can scroll up or down the display by tapping v or V. 6 [Space] button A space is entered. 7 [Back space] button The letter right before the cursor is deleted. If you tap the button for about three seconds, all the characters before the cursor are deleted. 8 button The cursor moves to a new line. 9 [Enter] button Tap this button to decide or close the input screen. I n t r o d u c t i o n 11 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode The available characters list When selecting [abc]
Alphabetical characters The alphabet keyboard has 2 types (PC Style and Alphabetical order). The default setting is PC arrangement. You can change the keyboard setting in for more information.
(PC Style)
(Alphabetical order)
. Refer to page 17 a n A N b o B O c p C P d q D Q e r E R f s F S g t G T h u H U i v I V j w J W k x K X l y L Y m z M Z Symbol characters The symbol characters below are inputted by single tapping:
~
_
@
:
The green keys input the symbol characters. The symbol characters change as follows:
Key Character A: t t t A t... E: t t t E t... I: t t t I t... O: t t t O t... U: t t t U t... Y: Y t Y t... A: t t A t... E: t E t... I: t I t... N: t N t... O: t t O t... U: t U t...
` *
*
?
!
. ,
/ \
a: t t t a t... e: t t t e t... i: t t t i t... o: t t t o t... u: t t t u t... y: y t y t... a: t t a t... e: t e t... i: t i t... n: t n t... o: t t o t... u: t u t... y: t y t... t t t ...
? t t ? t ...
! t t ! t ... t t t t... t , t . t ...
/ t \ t / t ...
* You can input the alphabet characters with accent symbols. When you input the characters, tap ` or after inputting a, e, i, n, o, u, y, A, E, I, N, O, U or Y. 12 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode When selecting [123]
Symbol characters
(Numerical order) 1 4 7
*
2 5 8 0 3 6 9
#
+
/
=
(
[
{
<
)
]
}
>
$
&
`
. C
:
\
|
;
%
, _ To switch between upper and lower case alphabet letters Tap [a/A] to change the alphabetical keyboard, then enter characters. To delete a character Move the cursor with the stylus to the right of the character at which you want to delete, tap [Back space]. The character at the left of the cursor is deleted. To add a character Move the cursor with the stylus to the position at which you want to add a character, then input characters. To start a new line Tap [
]. I n t r o d u c t i o n 13 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode E.g., Enter Hello into the Subject item on the Send screen 1
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder.
(2) Tap [
Mail]. The Send screen appears.
, 2 Entering the subject of a message
(1) Tap [Subject].
(2) Tap [
New]. The character input screen appears.
, 14 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode 3
(1) Tap [abcy123], then tap [abc].
(2) Tap [a/A] to be able to enter upper-case letters.
(3) Tap [H]. H is entered.
,
,
(4) Tap [a/A] to be able to enter lower-case letters.
, I n t r o d u c t i o n 15 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode
(5) Tap [e]. e is entered.
(6) Tap [l], [l] and [o]. llo is entered.
,
,
(7) Tap [Enter]. Hello is entered and the Send screen appears again.
, 16 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Basic operations in the NETWORK mode Character input setting Keyboard You can change the display of the alphabet, PC arrangement keyboard or ABC arrangement keyboard into a setup you want when you input characters. 1 Tap in the character input screen.
, 2 Tap the desired setting. You can set as the following two displays when [abcy123] is set as [abc].
(PC Style is the default setting.) PC Style (PC arrangement keyboard) Alphabetical order (ABC arrangement keyboard) PC Style Alphabetical order To switch the setting, tap on the upper-right LCD screen. I n t r o d u c t i o n 17 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Preparation Using the NETWORK functions There are three Network functions, namely album on the Web, email, and browser. To use the album on the Web and So-net, you need to complete customer registration. So-net is charged service. For more information, see the supplied flyer Getting Online with your Sony Network Handycam camcorder. To fully use the function in the NETWORK mode, you have to complete the following registrations and setup tasks via your camcorder:
Bluetooth device registration (p. 20) 1 2 DI customer registration (p. 28) 3 Album registration (p. 31) 4 So-net registration* (p. 33) 5 Network Setup (p. 34)
* So-net registration is not necessary to use the other provider. The above registrations can also be done on the web site using a computer. Access to the following URL:
http://www.myimagecam.com/
18 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology What is the Bluetooth wireless technology?
The Bluetooth wireless technology allows communication between various Bluetooth devices without using cables. Devices which can use this technology include PCs, computer peripheral devices, PDAs, and mobile phones. This omnidirectional communication system enables communication even if the Bluetooth device is in a bag or having obstacles between the devices. Also, the Bluetooth wireless technology has advanced security functions, such as scrambled frequencies and data encryption. Authentication The authentication routine can block unspecified users access to this network. When attempting communication with an unregistered Bluetooth device, the devices must first be registered with each other by entering a common passkey to each device. When connecting with a previously registered Bluetooth device, communication starts without entering the passkey. P r e p a r a t i o n 19 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology Registering a Bluetooth device This section describes making a registration of a Bluetooth device. Here we describe the procedure for registering the Sony Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function. Once the registration is completed, your camcorder can connect to your Bluetooth device without reregistering the device. You can register up to three Bluetooth devices. Also, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your Bluetooth device. For more information about Bluetooth devices compatible with your camcorder, access the following URL: http://www.myimagecam.com/
Notes When using Sony BTA-NW1 Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function, place it at a location that has no obstacles between your camcorder and the device. The distance between the devices must be within 10 m (33 feet). The connection may be interrupted depending on the communication conditions. Using your Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function 1 Preparing the Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function Set the Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function to connection standby (BONDING). For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function. 20 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology 2 Specifying your Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function as the connection device
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder.
(2) Tap [
Setup]. The Setup screen appears.
,
(3) Tap [Bluetooth Setup]. The Bluetooth Setup screen appears.
, P r e p a r a t i o n 21 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology
(4) Tap [Select]. The Bluetooth devices list appears. When making a registration for the first New] are indicated. The list shows up to three time, only [
Bluetooth devices. You can select one of the latest used three Bluetooth devices from the list. Return] and [
, Tip The last-used Bluetooth device is listed next to [
Return] and [
New].
(5) Tap [
New]. Your camcorder starts searching for your Bluetooth devices. When the searching is completed, the available Bluetooth devices list appears. When some Bluetooth devices with the same name appear, display each Bluetooth device address by tapping [More info.].
,
, Notes The search takes from about 10 to 60 seconds. The time depends on the number of Bluetooth devices around your camcorder. If the Bluetooth device you want to register is not found, carry out the procedure again from step 4.
(6) Tap the desired Bluetooth device. The character input screen appears.
, 22 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology
(7) Enter the passkey. For details on how to input characters, see How to input characters (p. 9). For example, when using the BTA-NW1 Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function, the passkey is its serial number which is indicated on the label on the rear panel. MODEM ADAPTOR WITH BLUETOOTHTM FUNCTION MODEL NO. BTA-NW1 Passkey The number used when registering a Bluetooth device P r e p a r a t i o n Tip on Passkey The passkey is an identification number needed to allow two Bluetooth devices to communicate with each other. The connection will be permitted after entering the passkey. This Passkey is also referred to as a Bluetooth passkey, PIN, Bluetooth PIN, etc. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your Bluetooth adaptor.
(8) After entering the passkey, tap [Enter]. After the registration is completed, the Bluetooth Setup screen appears again. Bluetooth Registration Complete message is displayed. Tap [OK]. The selected Bluetooth device is specified.
,
, Note When the message Bluetooth Registration Error Check the Passkey is indicated, tap [OK]. Carry out the procedure again from step 4.
(9) Tap [Exit]. The Setup screen appears again. For details on how to turn off the Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your Modem Adaptor with Bluetooth Function. 23 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology
(10)Tap [Exit]. The Network Menu appears again.
, When the registration has failed After pressing [OK], and carry out the procedure described in step 4 on page 22 again. Displaying information on your camcorder You can display your camcorder information.
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder. 24 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology
(2) Tap [
Setup]. The Setup screen appears.
,
(3) Tap [Bluetooth Setup]. The Bluetooth Setup screen appears.
,
(4) Tap [Info.]. The Bluetooth Setup: Self information screen appears. The model name This is the unique address assigned to each camcorder at the factory. This address is used when exchanging information between devices. This address cannot be modified.
(The number indicated on the illustration is an example number.) To return Bluetooth Setup screen Tap [Return]. P r e p a r a t i o n 25 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology Radio wave indication indicates the radio wave status of the connected Bluetooth device. (Use this indication as a guide.) Selecting other Bluetooth devices from the list Tap the Bluetooth device you want to specify in step 4 on page 22. The device information is indicated. Tap [Exit]. Deleting a registered Bluetooth device from the list You can register up to three Bluetooth devices on your camcorder. When deleting a Bluetooth device from the list, follow the procedure below.
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder.
(2) Tap [
Setup]. The Setup screen appears.
, 26 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Overview of the Bluetooth wireless technology
(3) Tap [Bluetooth Setup]. The Bluetooth Setup screen appears.
,
(4) Tap [Select]. The Bluetooth devices list appears.
,
(5) Tap the device you want to delete. The device name and address of the selected device are indicated.
,
(6) Tap [Delete]. The selected device is deleted from the list. P r e p a r a t i o n 27 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Customer registration DI customer registration The camcorder offers network functions in addition to its basic functions. In order to take full advantage of these network functions, you should complete the DI (Digital Imaging) customer registration for the services provided. For details on services available, see the supplied flyer Getting Online now with your Sony Network Handycam camcorder. Before making your DI customer registration, please see Online Privacy Policy on page 109 and agree to the terms. For the latest information, please refer to http://www.sel.sony.com/SEL/legal/privacy.html. You can make your DI customer registration in one of the following ways:
1 Online registration using your PC (recommended) 2 Online registration using your camcorder When you complete your DI customer registration, your DI customer ID and password are issued immediately. Online registration using your PC You can make your DI customer registration using your PC. The URL of the web site for online registration is http://www.myimagecam.com/. Online registration with your camcorder You can make your DI customer registration with your camcorder. For online registration using your camcorder, you must use a private line. Since the registration process is assigned a toll-free telephone number, the telephone charge for the online registration will not be charged to your telephone bill. Notes Set up your camcorder and your Bluetooth device so that they are communicating with each other beforehand. For details, refer to Registering a Bluetooth device on page 20. It may take a significant amount of time to complete your online registration. Use the AC power adapter when registering online using your camcorder. Be sure to set up the clock of your camcorder beforehand. For details, refer to Setting the date and time in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder. The procedure for registering online with your camcorder is as follows:
28 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Customer registration
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder. P r e p a r a t i o n 29
(2) Tap [
Setup]. The Setup screen menu appears.
,
(3) Tap [Online Registration]. The screen for verifying the connection appears. Tap [Connect]. Your camcorder starts connecting to the site. Once the connection is completed, the online registration screen appears. Set the Bluetooth device to connection standby using the camcorder beforehand. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your Bluetooth device.
(4) Register your information following the on-screen guidance. When registering for the first time, tap [Registration link] from the menu. Note When you are registering, you will need the registration code located on the cover of your operating instructions. After entering this code, follow the on-screen guidance. DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Customer registration
(5) After you complete your customer registration, continue on to register your album (page 31). Note When registering online with your camcorder, the connection may be disconnected. However, data entry can be done offline. When your camcorder needs to connect with the site, the screen for verifying the connection appears. Tap [Connect], the connection will be established again. About the DI customer ID and password After customer registration, album registration, or So-net registration has been completed, a DI customer ID and password will be displayed. The ID and password are very important, so be sure to write them down in the Setup memo on page 108. Continue to Registering your album on the Web. 30 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Registering your album on the Web To upload an image recorded with your camcorder to your album on the Web, you have to complete your album registration. Before registering, be sure to read ImageStations Privacy Policy (p. 109) and Member Agreement (p. 114). If you do not agree to the terms, you cannot complete the registration. The Album registration is done by either of the following ways:
1 Complete the album registration during your DI customer registration step 2 Complete the album registration after the DI customer registration is completed 1 Complete the album registration during your DI customer registration step
(1) Continue the album registration after completing DI customer registration. Fill in the album registration form following on-screen directions. After the album registration is completed, continue on to the So-net registration screen (page 33). 2 Complete the album registration after the DI customer registration is completed P r e p a r a t i o n
(1) Display the online registration screen following the procedure described in Completing the online registration with your camcorder (p. 28).
(2) Tap [Login link].
(3) Enter your DI customer ID and password, and log in.
(4) Tap [Album sign-up link].
(5) Complete the album registration following the on-screen guidance. Tip on Member name Your member name is a nickname used on the ImageStation web site. Once you register your member name, that member name is indicated on your album when it is opened using a computer, and it is also used on your invitation card. Tip If you do not have email address, complete registering So-net before registering your album on the Web. To cancel your album registration, then tap menu on the upper-right LCD screen, and tap END in the menu bar. For detail on how to display menu bar, refer to page 84. 31 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Internet service provider To access the Internet, you have to sign-up with an Internet service provider (ISP). The provider acts as an intermediary between your camcorder and the Internet. After you sign-up with a provider; you can view various web pages through the Internet, you can send and receive email using your email address. The email address is a destination address in email transmission. Also, various other services may be available depending on your provider. Notes A credit card may be required to sign-up with some providers. The connection fee depends on your provider. Using the recommended provider (So-net) So-net is an Internet service provider. For details on the services of So-net, see the supplied flyer Getting Online with your Sony Network Handycam camcorder. The So-net option makes it easy to set the Internet and email preferences. Once you complete your DI customer registration, you can get your DI customer ID and password. Entering your DI customer ID, password, and the telephone number of an access point, you can access the Internet right away. Using the other provider When using an ordinary provider or when not using the So-net option, you have to set the Internet and email preferences. For details on setup, see Setting network preferences (p. 34). Note You cannot use the network function when using a provider that requires its own exclusive browser software. 32 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Registering with So-net You can complete your online registration with So-net using your camcorder. You can also sign up with So-net in your DI customer registration step. The So-net registration is done by either of the following ways:
1 Register for So-net in your DI customer registration step 2 Register for So-net after the DI customer registration is completed 1 Register for So-net in your DI customer registration step
(1) Fill in So-net registration form following on-screen directions.
(2) After completing registration, tap END in the menu bar. 2 Register for So-net after the DI customer registration is completed P r e p a r a t i o n
(1) Display the online registration screen following the procedure described in Online registration with your camcorder (p. 28).
(2) Tap [Login link].
(3) Enter your DI customer ID and password, and log in.
(4) Tap [So-net sign-up link].
(5) Input necessary items for registering So-net as following message on the screen. You can search information about access point on the registration web site. For details, see the supplied flyer Getting Online with your Sony Network Handycam camcorder. Tip Be sure to make a note of telephone numbers of access points indicated on the screen on the Setup Menu (p. 108). To cancel registering with So-net, then tap the menu button menu on the upper-right LCD screen, and tap END in the menu bar. For detail on how to display the menu bar, refer to page 84. 33 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences You have to access the Internet to make your album on the Web, view web pages, or send or receive your email. This section describes how to set network preferences to access the Internet. Entering your DI customer ID and password Enter the DI (Digital Imaging) customer ID and password you obtained as a result of your DI customer registration. This setup is required to use the So-net option and make your album on the Web.
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder.
(2) Tap [
Setup]. The Setup screen appears.
,
(3) Tap [Network Setup]. The Network Setup screen appears.
, 34 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences
(4) Tap [ID]. The character input screen appears.
,
(5) Enter your DI customer ID. For details on how to input characters, see How to input characters (p. 9).
(6) Tap [Enter]. The Network Setup screen appears again.
,
(7) Tap [Password]. The character input screen appears.
,
(8) Enter your password. For details on how to input characters, see How to input characters (p. 9). Note When you check the item Verify Password in the Network Options screen, you cannot enter your password. If you try to enter it, the message Password Already Set Check the Password Profile appears. P r e p a r a t i o n 35 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences
(9) Tap [Enter]. The Network Setup screen appears again.
, Tip While inputting password characters, they are visible as they are. However, after it has been entered, each character is indicated as . If you enter your password again, delete all before entering the password.
(10)Tap [Exit]. The setup of the DI customer ID and password are complete, and the Setup screen appears again. Setting your provider preferences When using So-net carry out the following procedures:
1 So-net setting 2 Entering the telephone numbers of your access points 4 Setting network options preferences When using the other provider, carry out the following procedures:
3 Setting your provider preferences manually 4 Setting network options preferences Tip Even if you do not set up the items described in 4 Setting network options preferences, you can access the Internet by using the default setting. Tip on password When you check the item Verify Password on the Network Options screen, you have to enter your password whenever you connect to your Internet service provider. For details, see 4 Setting network options preferences 36 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences 1 So-net settings
(1) Tap [Network Setup]. The Network Setup screen appears. The default setting is So-net.
, P r e p a r a t i o n
(2) Tap [Setting]. The Provider Setting: So-net screen appears.
, Go to 2 Entering the telephone numbers of your access points on page 38. 37 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences 2 Entering the telephone numbers of your access points This setup is only for those using So-net. For more information on the telephone numbers of access points, see the supplied flyer Getting Online with your Sony Network Handycam camcorder. Tip on access points So-net installs access points in various areas. We recommend that you select the most convenient access point which allows you to obtain the lowest telephone charges.
(1) Tap [TEL1]. The character input screen appears.
,
(2) Enter the telephone number of your access point. For details on how to input characters, see How to input characters(p. 9). Note Do not insert hyphens or spaces in the telephone number. (e.g. 0312345678)
(3) Tap [Enter]. The Provider Setting: So-net screen appears again.
, Tip You can also register the telephone numbers of access points into [TEL2] and
[TEL3]. If necessary, enter the numbers into [TEL2] and [TEL3].
(4) Tap [Exit]. The telephone number registration is complete. Go to 4 Setting other preferences (p. 42). 38 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences 3 Setting your provider preferences manually If you have already made the So-net settings, you do not need to make the following settings.
(1) Tap [Network Setup]. The Network Setup screen appears.
,
(2) Tap [Custom]. a is checked and changes to
.
,
(3) Tap [Setting]. The Provider Setup: Custom screen appears.
,
(4) Tap [PPP]. P r e p a r a t i o n 39 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences
(5) Set up the following items:
ID: Enter the login name you use for accessing your provider using a dial-up connection. This ID is also referred to as a user ID, login name, PPP login name, network ID, account name, logon name, user name, etc. Password: Enter the password you use for accessing your provider using a dial-up connection. (Dial-up connection t Glossary (p. 107)) This Password is also referred to as a PPP password, network password, connection password, etc. DNS1: Enter the DNS (Domain Name System) server address of your provider. This DNS1 is also referred to as a name server, primary DNS server, This entry may be unnecessary, depending on your provider. For details, consult primary name server, etc. your provider. DNS2: Enter the secondary DNS server address of your provider, if necessary. This DNS2 is also referred to as a secondary DNS server, etc. This entry may be unnecessary, depending on your provider. For details, consult your provider. TEL No. 1: Enter the telephone number of your most convenient access point.
(Access point t Glossary (p. 106)) TEL No. 2/TEL No. 3: Enter the second and third telephone numbers, if necessary.
(6) Tap [Mail]. The Mail preference screen appears.
(7) Set up the following items:
User ID: Enter the user ID name you use for your provider. Password: Enter the password of your user ID for accessing the POP server. Your user ID and password are required to use email. This Password is also referred to as a mail password, mail server password, etc. Address: Enter your email address. This Address is also referred to as a mail address, email address, etc. 40 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences POP Server: Enter the POP (Post Office Protocol) server address of your provider. The POP server is for receiving email. This POP Server is also referred to as a mail server, POP3 server, etc. SMTP Server: Enter the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server address of your provider. The SMTP server is for sending email. This SMTP Server is also referred to as a mail server, SMTP mail server, etc. The SMTP server may be the same as the POP server, depending on the provider. APOP: Select whether you want to use APOP. (APOP t Glossary (p. 106)) P r e p a r a t i o n
(8) Tap [Browser]. The Browser screen appears.
(9) Set up the following items:
Proxy: Enter the proxy server address of your provider. Port: Enter the port number of the proxy server of your provider. This entry may be unnecessary, depending on your provider. For details, consult your provider.
(10)Tap [Exit]. The setup is completed, and the Network Setup screen appears again.
(11)Tap [Exit]. The Setup screen appears again. 41 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences 4 Setting other preferences You can access the Internet with your camcorder using the default settings. It is not necessary to make the following settings. This example is provided to show you how to make changes, if necessary, in the future.
(1) Display the Setup screen.
(2) Tap [Network Options]. The Network Options screen appears.
,
(3) Set up the following items:
Verify Password: Select whether password entry is required when you access your provider. When you check this item, your password on the PPP screen is deleted. You have to enter your DI customer ID and password for accessing your album on the Web, or enter your password for accessing your provider each time you try to make a connection. This can prevent other persons from connecting to your provider using your ID. Note When this item is checked:
You cannot set your DI customer ID password and your password for accessing your provider. You cannot use your album on the Web if you set your preferences manually. Time Out: Select whether the connection is automatically canceled if no communication is made for specific time (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, or 30 minutes). Note The telephone line may not be disconnected automatically depending on web pages. In this case, disconnect the telephone line manually (p. 95). 42 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences Mail Send&Receive: Select whether to check the email inbox after sending email. Restrict: Select whether to skip an email message if its file size is more than 50 KB, 200 KB, or 500 KB. Save Mail to Server: Select whether to keep copies of the messages on the server. Note If you try to receive email without checking this item, email messages may not be downloaded and may be lost from your server, depending on the type of email you receive. For details, see Note on Save Mail to Server
(p. 44). P r e p a r a t i o n Signature: Set up this item when you want to attach your signature to email (p. 67). Browser Cookie: Select whether to accept a cookie. When you do not want to send your personal information, do not check this item. This item is checked at the default setting. Image Display: Select whether to display images on the screen when viewing a web page. This item is checked at the default setting. Reset: Reset all the items on the Network Options screen except Signature and Modem Init. Note A verification message does not appear when you try to reset items. Modem Init: Set up the character string to be used for modem initialization. If no setup is specified, you do not need to modify this item. Note If the setup is wrong, the message Connection Error No Response From PPP Server appears when you try to access the Internet and you will not be able to access the Internet.
(4) Tap [Exit]. The Setup screen appears again. 43 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Setting network preferences Note on Save Mail to Server When Save Mail to Server is not checked, copies of email messages received will not be stored on your server. However, the following error messages described below depend on the type of email messages. See the table below. Messages1) Memory Stick Memory Full Mail Over Size Limit Attached Invalid File Deleted Mail Over Size Limit Cause and/or Corrective Actions You tried to download email when the Memory Stick is already full. 2) c Delete the email, and delete unnecessary email messages or image files in the Memory Stick, then download your email again. c Insert another Memory Stick that has sufficient memory, then download your email again. You tried to download email whose size is over the size set in the item Restrict. 2) c You can download that email using your computer, etc. c Delete the email, and release the checkmark of the item Restrict, then download that email again. You downloaded email that has an attached file whose file name extension is invalid. 3) c The camcorder cannot receive files other than those in the JPEG or MPEG format. You downloaded an email message whose the number of characters of the message is more than 4000. 3) c The camcorder cannot receive an email message that has 4 000 characters or more. 4) Memory Stick Directory Error c Insert another Memory Stick that has sufficient memory, then download your email again. 1) These error messages are indicated in a message. 2) These email messages are stored on the server even if you did not check the item Save Mail to Server. You can retrieve that email using your computer, etc. 3) The previously downloaded email is not stored on the server if you did not check the item Save Mail to Server. You cannot retrieve this email using your computer, etc. 4) For email messages that have lots of line break, the number of available characters is less than 4 000. 44 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Network Operation Making your album on the Web You can upload still or moving images to your album on the Web through the Internet and post the images on your album. The album on the Web is provided with ImageStation. You can make an image album on the Web as a simplified web page and send an invitation card to invite your friends to your album. You can also access your album on the Web with your computer. To access your album from your computer, log in to the ImageStation web site with your DI customer ID and password. For more information on ImageStation, access the ImageStation web site
(http://www.imagestation.com/us/PC/). Uploading images to your album on the Web Once you have an album on the Web, you can upload images to the album, and send invitation cards to your friends. This section describes how to upload your images and send invitation cards. As for moving images, upload images within the file size constraints of ImageStation. For details, access the ImageStation web site (http://www.imagestation.com/us/
PC/). Before operation Store the desired images in a Memory Stick and insert it into your camcorder. 1 Selecting an album First, select an album to use to upload images.
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder. N e t w o r k O p e r a t i o n 45 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web
(2) Tap [
Album]. The Album screen appears.
,
(3) Tap [
Upload]. The Album: Upload screen appears.
,
(4) Tap [Album No.]. The album list page appears.
,
(5) Tap the desired album. Selecting the album is complete.
, The number of prepared albums There are 10 albums (Album 01 to 10). 46 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web 2 Selecting images to upload Next, select the images to upload.
(1) Tap [Image Sel.]. The image index list appears.
, N e t w o r k O p e r a t i o n
(2) Tap the desired images. Tap the image you want to upload. The selected image is indicated by the checkmark (
). To page up or down the image index list Tap [<] or [,]. The next or previous page that contains six images is displayed.
(3) Repeat step 2 to select other images. Notes The total number of images you can upload is 99, and the maximum file size you can upload is up to total 3 MB. You can upload images to only one album once.
(4) Tap [
OK]. The Album: Upload screen appears again. The total number of selected images and total file size are indicated.
, When you only want to upload images, go to 5 Uploading images on (p. 51). 47 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web 3 Sending an invitation card (email) Select the addressee to send the invitation card (email) to.
(1) Tap [Invitation]. The Album: Invitation screen appears.
,
(2) Tap [To]. The address list appears. The list shows the destination addresses that are registered in the address book. For details on the address book, see Using the address book (p. 69).
, When you have selected the address listed in the address book, go to step 6. Tips The last-used address is listed next to New. Addresses are listed in historical order.
(3) Tap [
New]. The character input screen appears.
,
(4) Enter the email address of the destination address. For details on how to input characters, see How to input characters (p. 9). 48 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web
(5) Tap [Enter]. The Album: Invitation screen appears again. The new email address is listed and its check box is indicated by the checkmark (
).
,
(6) If you want to send the invitation card to other addressees, tap other email addresses. The check box of the selected email address is indicated by the checkmark (
(7) Tap [
Return]. N e t w o r k O p e r a t i o n
). The Album: Invitation screen appears again. Note If you try to send an invitation card with 50 addresses registered in the address book, the last-used address will be deleted. The message Address Book Full Overwrite the Data with Current Address? appears for verification. To overwrite it, tap [OK]. Otherwise you tap [Cancel], and delete the unnecessary address from the address book, then enter a new address. 49 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web 4 Entering the text of a message Enter the text of the message. You can select the text from the message list, or edit it to suit your purposes. The list shows up to six messages. Selecting a lately used message Tap [Message]. The message list appears.
, The list shows messages that were written previously. Tap the message to select it from the list. If you want to edit text, tap [Edit]. The character input screen appears. Go to step 3. When desired text is selected, tap [OK]. After you select the message, go to 5 Uploading images (p. 51). Writing a new message
(1) Tap [
New]. The character input screen appears.
,
(2) Enter your text. For details on how to input characters, see How to input characters (p. 9). Note The maximum number of characters you can enter is 512. 50 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web
(3) Tap [Enter]. The Album: Invitation screen appears again.
,
(4) Tap [OK]. The Album: Upload screen appears again. Yes is indicated next to [Invitation].
, 5 Uploading images
(1) Tap [Send]. The screen for verifying the connection appears. Set your Bluetooth device to connection standby with your camcorder beforehand. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your Bluetooth device.
,
(2) Check the telephone number. When dialing other telephone numbers Tap [TEL No.]. The registered telephone number list appears. Tap the desired telephone number to select it. N e t w o r k O p e r a t i o n 51 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web
(3) Tap [Connect]. Your camcorder starts dialing the selected telephone number. After the uploading is completed, the message Upload Complete appears.
,
,
(4) Tap [OK]. The Album: Upload screen appears again. To cancel uploading During uploading, tap [Cancel]. To send only an invitation card (email) You can send an invitation card without uploading images. Carry out the following procedures:
1 Selecting an album (p. 45) 3 Sending an invitation card (email) (p. 48) 4 Entering the text of a message (p. 50) 5 Uploading images (p. 51) After the invitation card has been sent, the message Invitation Mail Complete appears. Viewing or editing your album on the Web You can view or download images from your album on the Web. 1 Viewing images
(1) Open the Network Menu. For details on how to open the Network Menu, refer to Accessing the network in the operating instructions supplied with your camcorder.
(2) Tap [
Album]. The Album screen appears.
, 52 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web
(3) Tap [
View/Edit]. The screen for verifying the connection appears. Set your Bluetooth device to connection standby with your camcorder beforehand. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your Bluetooth device.
,
(4) Check the telephone number. When dialing other telephone numbers Tap [TEL No.]. The registered telephone number list appears. Tap the desired telephone number. The selected telephone number is specified.
(5) Tap [Connect]. Your camcorder starts dialing the selected telephone number. After the connection is completed, the album list page appears.
,
(6) Tap the album number that you want to view or edit. The index page appears.
, To see a description of each function button Tap [?].
(7) Tap the desired image. The image is enlarged to fill the screen. Tips When you want to end viewing or editing images in your album on the Web, tap menu on the upper-right LCD screen, then tap END . The actual screen may differ. N e t w o r k O p e r a t i o n 53 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web 2 Downloading images from the album Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder, for storing images. Release the lock of the Memory Stick.
(1) Select the images you want to download. You can select the images in the following two ways:
Selecting images from the index page:
You can select several images and download them at one time. For details, see To select images from the index page (p. 55). Selecting an image displayed on the single-image page:
You can select the image displayed on the single-image page and download it. For details, see To select an image displayed on the single-image page (p. 56).
(2) Check the number of images and the total file size. When you selected a single image When you selected several images To cancel downloading the images Tap [Cancel].
(3) Tap [OK]. The message Downloading appears. After the downloading is completed, the message Download Complete appears.
,
,
(4) Tap [OK]. The index page or single-image page appears. To cancel downloading During downloading, tap [Cancel]. 54 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web To view a downloaded image Exit the NETWORK mode, then view the image following the same procedure as that for viewing an image recorded on a Memory Stick. In such cases, the file name displayed on your camcorder is indicated in the following order: 700-0001, 700-0002, 700-0003 ... Notes Do not eject the Memory Stick during downloading. After completing downloading, the check mark(s) remains on selected images. You can download JPG and MPG files. When you download images modified with your computer or images recorded with other devices, your camcorder may not be able to play back the images properly. To select images from the index page
(1) Tap the check box of the desired image. The check box is indicated by the checkmark (
).
,
(2) When you select other images, repeat step 1.
(3) Tap
. The screen for verification appears. Set your Bluetooth device to connection standby with your camcorder beforehand. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your Bluetooth device.
, To select all the images Tap
. To cancel selecting images Tap the check box of the image again. N e t w o r k O p e r a t i o n 55 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web To cancel all the selected images Tap
. To return to the album list page Tap
. To select an image displayed on the single-image page You can select an image displayed on the full-screen and download it.
(1) When the index page is displayed, tap the image to be enlarged. The image is indicated on the single-image page.
(2) When you want to view other image, tap or
.
(3) Tap
. The screen for verification appears.
, To return to the index page Tap
. To return to the album list page Tap
. 56 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US Making your album on the Web Deleting images from your album You can delete images from your album. To delete images displayed on the index page in step 3 in To You can select several images and delete them at one time. Tap select images from the index page (p. 55). The screen for verification appears. Tap
[OK]. The index page appears again. To delete an image displayed on the single-image page Tap in step 3 in To select an image displayed on the single-image page
(p. 56). The screen for verification appears. Tap [OK]. The next image is displayed. If the album is empty The message There is no pictures in this album. appears. N e t w o r k O p e r a t i o n Return to the Album list page Tap
. Finishing viewing or editing the album To finish viewing or editing the album, and disconnect the phone line
(1) When the menu bar is not displayed, tap menu on the upper-right LCD screen. The menu bar appears.
(2) Tap END (End). The album is closed, then the line is disconnected. To only disconnect the phone line Tap
(Line Close). Only the phone line is disconnected. Tip When you only disconnect the phone line, you can continue to view the album displayed on the screen. If you try to download an image, delete an image, or view another album, verification appears on the screen. 57 DCR-TRV50 Network 3-074-603-11(1).US
1 | manual insert | Users Manual | 68.50 KiB | / July 03 2002 |
2A cotbousu soos bub WH ebau 1000-10600) wage"
{6 surcuUs pve pocu TwersTIoq ph qys UIaUN{SCEMCL suq UO cpsuce cs pe sureuus Twersq|stou sug qeArce obstsM coupEmsroue ner po estreuteq:
LO combpA UP ECC Bk exboemve combysuce redamsweue (pe yorjomIwe IWBOBLWUL MOLE 2OUk* DCB-LKA20
1 | manual1 | Users Manual | 2.35 MiB | / July 03 2002 |
3-074-375-11 (1) Digital Video Camera Recorder Operating Instructions Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and retain it for future reference. Owners Record The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product. Model No. DCR-TRV Serial No. Model No. AC-
Serial No. TM SERIES DCR-TRV50 DCR-TRV40/TRV50 2002 Sony Corporation Welcome!
Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Handycam. With your Handycam, you can capture lifes precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Handycam is loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come. WARNING To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard. As the laser beam used in this Handycam is harmful to eyes, do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet. Refer to servicing to qualified personnel only. Notice If static electricity or electromagnetism causes data transfer to discontinue midway (fail), restart the application or disconnect and connect the USB cable again. 2 For customers in the U.S.A. and CANADA CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable. You can help preserve our environment by returning your used rechargeable batteries to the collection and recycling location nearest you. For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-
8837, or visit http://www.rbrc.org/
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking Lithium-Ion batteries. DCR-TRV50 only Countries and areas where you can use network functions are restricted. For details, refer to the separate Network Operating Instructions. For customers in the U.S.A. If you have any questions about this product, you may call:
Sony Customer Information Center 1-800-222-
SONY (7669) The number below is for the FCC related matters only. Regulatory Information Declaration of Conformity Trade Name:
Model No.:
Responsible Party:
Address:
SONY DCR-TRV50 Sony Electronics Inc. 680 Kinderkamack Road, Oradell, NJ07649 U.S.A. 201-930-6972 Telephone No.:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The term IC before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Memory Stick This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment. Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. The supplied interface cable must be used with the equipment in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. For customers in CANADA Memory Stick This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. 3 Main features Recording moving pictures or still images, and playing them back Recording moving pictures on a tape (p. 26) Recording still images on a tape
(p. 52) Playing back a tape (p. 40) Recording still images on Memory Sticks (p. 47, 126) Recording moving pictures on Memory Sticks (p. 144) Viewing still images recorded on Memory Sticks (p. 156) Viewing moving pictures on Memory Sticks (p. 159) Capturing images on your computer Viewing images recorded on Memory Sticks using the USB cable
(p. 190, 195) Viewing moving pictures recorded on tapes using the USB cable (p. 185) Capturing images on your computer from your camcorder using the USB cable (p. 187) Converting an analog signal into digital to capture images onto your computer (p. 196) M a i n F e a t u r e s 4 4 Main features Accessing the Internet via a Bluetooth equipped device
(DCR-TRV50 only) Accessing the Internet, sending/
receiving your e-mail. For details, refer to the Network Function Operating Instructions supplied with your camcorder. (DCR-
TRV50 only) (p. 197) Other uses Functions for adjusting exposure in the recording mode BACK LIGHT (p. 34) NightShot/Super NightShot/Color Slow Shutter (p. 34) Recording images with the flash (p. 49, 130) PROGRAM AE (p. 64) Adjusting the exposure manually (p. 67) Flexible Spot Meter (p. 68) Functions for giving images more impact Digital zoom (p. 31) The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 10, select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings.) Fader (p. 57) Picture effect (p. 60) Digital effect (p. 61) Titles (p. 110) MEMORY MIX (p. 139) Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings Manual focus (p. 69) Sports lesson (p. 64) Landscape (p. 64) Spot Focus (p. 71) Functions for using after recording END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/Rec Review (p. 38) DATA CODE (p. 42) Tape PB ZOOM (p. 77) ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 79) TITLE SEARCH (p. 80) Digital program editing (p. 89, 151) G e t t i n g S t a r t e d M a i n F e a t u r e s 5 5 Table of contents Main features ..................................... 4 Quick Start Guide Recording on a tape ............................. 8 Recording on a Memory Stick ...... 10 Getting Started Using this manual ................................. 12 Checking supplied accessories ............ 14 Step 1 Preparing the power supply ... 15 Installing the battery pack ............ 15 Charging the battery pack............. 16 Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 19 Step 2 Setting the date and time ........ 20 Step 3 Inserting a cassette ................... 23 Step 4 Using the touch panel .............. 24 Recording Basics Recording a picture............................... 26 Shooting backlit subjects BACK LIGHT ........................ 34 Shooting in the dark NightShot/Super NightShot/
Color Slow Shutter .................. 34 Self-timer recording ....................... 37 Checking recordings END SEARCH/
EDITSEARCH/Rec Review .......... 38 Playback Basics Playing back a tape ............................... 40 To display the screen indicators Display function ................... 42 Viewing the recording on TV .............. 46 Advanced Recording Operations Recording still images on a Memory Stick during tape recording ........ 47 Recording still images on a tape Tape Photo recording ................. 52 Adjusting the white balance manually
........................................................... 54 Using the wide mode ........................... 55 Using the fader ...................................... 57 Using special effects Picture effect ................................. 60 Using special effects Digital effect ................................. 61 Using the PROGRAM AE .................... 64 Adjusting the exposure manually ...... 67 Using the spot light-metering Flexible Spot Meter ..................... 68 Focusing manually ................................ 69 Using the spot focus Spot Focus ...... 71 Interval recording ................................. 72 Frame by frame recording Frame recording .......................... 74 Advanced Playback Operations Playing back tapes with picture effect
........................................................... 75 Playing back tapes with digital effect
........................................................... 76 Enlarging images recorded on tapes Tape PB ZOOM ........................... 77 Quickly locating a scene ZERO SET MEMORY ................. 79 Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title TITLE SEARCH ..... 80 Searching a recording by date DATE SEARCH ........................... 81 Searching for a photo PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN ............. 83 Editing Dubbing a tape ...................................... 86 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes)
........................................................... 89 Recording video or TV programs ..... 100 Inserting a scene from a VCR Insert Editing ............................. 104 Audio dubbing .................................... 106 Superimposing a title ......................... 110 Making your own titles ...................... 113 Labeling a cassette .............................. 115 Memory Stick Operations Using a Memory Stick Introduction ............................... 117 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording ......... 126 Recording images from a tape as still images ..................................... 135 Superimposing a still image in the Memory Stick on an image MEMORY MIX .......................... 139 Recording moving pictures on Memory Sticks MPEG movie recording ............ 144 6 Table of contents Recording pictures from tape as a moving picture ............................. 147 Recording edited pictures from a tape as a moving picture Digital program editing
(on Memory Sticks) .................. 151 Copying still images from a tape PHOTO SAVE ............................ 154 Viewing still images Memory Photo playback .......... 156 Viewing moving pictures MPEG movie playback ............. 159 Copying images recorded on Memory Sticks to tape ............. 162 Enlarging still images recorded on Memory Sticks Memory PB ZOOM ................... 164 Playing back images in a continuous loop SLIDE SHOW .................... 166 Preventing accidental erasure Image protection ........................ 167 Deleting images DELETE ............... 168 Writing a print mark PRINT MARK ............................ 171 Using the optional printer ................. 172 Viewing Images Using your Computer Viewing images on your computer Introduction ............................... 174 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users ................... 177 Viewing images recorded on a tape on your computer For Windows users ................... 185 Viewing images recorded on a Memory Stick on your computer For Windows users ................... 190 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Macintosh users .................. 193 Viewing images recorded on a Memory Stick on your computer For Macintosh users .................. 195 Capturing images from an analog video unit on your computer Signal convert function ............. 196 Using the Network function
(DCR-TRV50 only) Accessing the network ....................... 197 For the details, refer to the Network Function Operating Instructions supplied with your camcorder. Customizing Your Camcorder Changing the default settings with the menu ........................................ 199 G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Troubleshooting Types of trouble and how to correct trouble ............................................ 210 Self-diagnosis display......................... 217 Warning indicators and messages .... 218 Additional Information Usable cassettes ................................... 220 About the InfoLITHIUM battery pack ................................................ 223 About i.LINK ....................................... 225 Using your camcorder abroad .......... 227 Maintenance information and precautions .................................... 228 Specifications ....................................... 234 Quick Reference Identifying parts and controls ........... 236 Index ..................................................... 245 7 Quick Start Guide Recording on a tape This chapter introduces you to the basic features to recorded pictures on tapes of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses
( ) for more information. Connecting the power cord (p. 19) Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15). Open the DC IN jack cover. AC power adaptor (supplied) Connect the plug with its v mark facing up. Inserting a cassette (p. 23) 1 Slide OPEN/
EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid. 2 Push the center of the cassette back to insert the cassette. Insert the cassette straight as far as possible into the cassette compartment with the window facing up. on the 3 Close the cassette compartment by pressing cassette compartment. After the cassette compartment goes down completely, close the lid until it clicks. Q u i c k S t a r t G u d e i 8 Recording a picture (p. 26) 1 Remove the lens cap. 3 Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. The picture appears on the screen. Viewfinder When the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder with your eye against the eyecup. Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight (p. 30). 2 Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button. POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 4 Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. To stop recording, press START/
STOP again. When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20). Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 40) 1 Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button. P O W E R VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 2 Press m to rewind the tape. REW 3 Press N to start playback. PLAY NOTE Do not pick up your camcorder by holding the viewfinder, the flash, the LCD panel or the battery pack. Q u i c k S t a r t G u d e i 9 Quick Start Guide Recording on a Memory Stick This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a Memory Stick of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses
(
) for more information. Connecting the power cord (p. 19) Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15). Open the DC IN jack cover. AC power adaptor (supplied) Connect the plug with its v mark facing up. Inserting a Memory Stick (p. 119) Insert a Memory Stick in the Memory Stick slot as far as it can go with the B mark facing up as illustrated. Memory Stick slot B mark Press the Memory Stick once lightly to eject it. Q u i c k S t a r t G u d e i 10 Recording a still image on Memory Stick (p. 126) 1 Remove the lens cap. 3 Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. The picture appears on the screen. Viewfinder When the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder with your eye against the eyecup. Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight (p. 30). 2 Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/
NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) while pressing the small green button. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position. POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 4 Press PHOTO lightly. 5 Press PHOTO deeper. When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20). Monitoring the playback still image on the LCD screen (p. 156) 1 Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/
NETWORK
(DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR while pressing the small green button. POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 2 Press PLAY or image is displayed. PB. The last recorded PLAY or PB NOTE Do not pick up your camcorder by holding the viewfinder, the flash, the LCD panel or the battery pack. Q u i c k S t a r t G u d e i 11 Getting Started Using this manual The instructions in this manual are for the two models listed in the table below. Before you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV50 is the model used for illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, DCR-TRV50 only. As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in capital letters. e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is being carried out. Types of differences DCR-
Mark on the POWER switch Network function z Provided Not provided Note on Cassette Memory TRV40 MEMORY TRV50 MEMORY/NETWORK z Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can use only mini DV cassettes with your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory
. Functions that require different operations depending on whether or not the tape has a cassette memory are:
End search (p. 38) Date search (p. 81) Photo search (p. 83) Functions you can operate only with the cassette memory are:
Title search (p. 80) Superimposing a title (p. 110) Labeling a cassette (p. 115) For details of cassette types, see page 220. You see this mark in the introduction of features that are operated only with cassette memory. Cassettes with cassette memory are marked by
(Cassette Memory). 12 Using this manual Note on TV color systems TV color systems differ depending on the country or region. To view your recordings on a TV, you need an NTSC system-based TV. Copyright precautions Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the copyright laws. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Precautions on camcorder care Lens and LCD screen/finder (on mounted models only) The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision technology, so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (white, red, blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder. These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recording in any way. Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction. Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a]. Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60C (140F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b]. Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause malfunctions [c]. Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction. Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d].
[a]
[c]
[b]
[d]
13 Checking supplied accessories Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 q;
qa qs qd 1 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor (1), power cord (1) (p. 16) 2 NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (p. 15, 16) 3 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 46) 4 Wireless Remote Commander (1)
(p. 242) 5 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote Commander (2) (p. 243) 6 Shoulder strap (1) 7 Lens cap (1) (p. 26) 8 Lens hood (1) (p. 30) 9 Memory Stick (1) (p. 117) 0 USB cable (1) (p. 180) qa CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB Driver) (1)
(p. 179) qs Cleaning cloth (1) (p. 229) qd Stylus (1) (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198) Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc. 14 Step 1 Preparing the power supply Installing the battery pack
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks. 1 2 To remove the battery pack
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT down. 1 2 2 BATT release button If you use the large capacity battery pack If you install the NP-FM70/QM71/FM90/FM91/QM91 battery pack on your camcorder, extend its viewfinder. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 15 Step 1 Preparing the power supply Charging the battery pack Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder. Your camcorder operates only with the InfoLITHIUM battery pack (M series). See page 223 for details of InfoLITHIUM battery pack.
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plugs v mark facing up.
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.
(3) Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The remaining battery time is indicated in minutes on the display window. When the remaining battery indicator changes to fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour after normal charge is completed until FULL appears in the display window. Fully charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.
, normal charge is completed. To 2 1 4 POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK After charging the battery pack Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder. 16 Step 1 Preparing the power supply Note Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power adaptor. Remaining battery time indicator The remaining battery time indicator in the display window indicates the approximate recording time with the viewfinder. Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time
---- min appears in the display window. When you use the AC power adaptor Place the AC power adaptor near a wall outlet. If any trouble occurs with this unit, disconnect the plug from a wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Charging time Battery pack NP-FM50 (supplied) NP-FM70 NP-QM71 NP-FM90 NP-FM91/QM91 Full charge (Normal charge) 150 (90) 240 (180) 260 (200) 330 (270) 360 (300) Approximate minutes at 25C (77F) to charge an empty battery pack The charging time may increase if the batterys temperature is extremely high or low because of the ambient temperature. Recording time Battery pack NP-FM50 (supplied) NP-FM70 NP-QM71 NP-FM90 NP-FM91/QM91 Recording with the viewfinder Recording with the LCD screen Continuous Typical*
Continuous Typical*
145 305 355 460 535 80 175 205 265 310 105 225 265 345 400 60 130 150 200 230 Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery
* Approximate number of minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/
stop, zooming and turning the power on/off. The actual battery life may be shorter. 17 Step 1 Preparing the power supply Playing time Battery pack NP-FM50 (supplied) NP-FM70 NP-QM71 NP-FM90 NP-FM91/QM91 Playing time with LCD closed Playing time on LCD screen 200 415 485 630 725 135 285 335 435 505 Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery Note Approximate recording time and continuous playing time at 25C (77F). The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment. If the power goes off although remaining battery time indicator indicates that the battery pack has enough power to operate Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining indicator is correct. Recommended charging temperature We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10C to 30C (50F to 86F). What is InfoLITHIUM?
The InfoLITHIUM is a lithium ion battery pack that can exchange data such as battery consumption with compatible electronic equipment. This unit is compatible with the InfoLITHIUM battery pack (M series). Your camcorder operates only with the InfoLITHIUM battery. InfoLITHIUM M series battery packs have the mark. TM InfoLITHIUM is a trademark of Sony Corporation. SERIES 18 Step 1 Preparing the power supply Connecting to a wall outlet When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a wall outlet using the AC power adaptor.
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover. Connect the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plugs v mark facing up.
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.
(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 1 2,3 PRECAUTION The set is not disconnected from the AC power supply (wall outlet) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off. Notes The AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your camcorder. The DC IN jack has source priority. This means that the battery pack cannot supply any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power cord is not plugged into a wall outlet. Using a car battery Use Sony Car Battery Adaptor (optional). Refer to the operating instructions of the Car Battery Adaptor for further information. 19 Step 2 Setting the date and time Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time. CLOCK SET will be displayed each time that you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) unless you set the date and time settings. If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time may be cleared from memory (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable battery installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 231). Set the area, the daylight saving time, year, month, day, hour and then the minute, in that order.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only), then press MENU to display the menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired area (where you are), then
, then press the dial. press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select whether or not the time is daylight saving time, then press the dial. Select OFF if the time is not daylight saving time. Select ON if it is.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired year, then press the dial. The year changes as follows:
1995 T t 2002 T t 2079
(7) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial.
(8) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by the time signal. The clock starts to move.
(9) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. 20 Step 2 Setting the date and time MENU 2 3 4 6 8 SETUP MENU CLOCK SET USB STREAM LTR SIZE LANGUAGE DEMO MODE
[MENU] : END SETUP MENU CLOCK SET USB STREAM LTR SIZE LANGUAGE DEMO MODE RETURN
[MENU] : END STBY
: :
STBY
: :
SETUP MENU CLOCK SET USB STREAM LTR SIZE LANGUAGE DEMO MODE RETURN
[MENU] : END CLOCK SET AREA 1 GMT +0.0 Lisbon, London R r DST OFF DATE Y M D
:
[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM G e t t i n g S t a r t e d R r R r R r CLOCK SET AREA26 GMT 5.0 NewYork, Bogota DST OFF DATE Y M D
:
5 CLOCK SET AREA26 GMT 5.0 NewYork, Bogota DST OFF ON DATE Y M D
:
[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM
[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM CLOCK SET AREA26 GMT 5.0 NewYork, Bogota CLOCK SET AREA26 GMT 5.0 NewYork, Bogota R r DST OFF DST OFF R DATE Y M D R 2002 JAN 1 12 : 00AM r R R R R r r r r r R DATE Y M D R 2002 JAN 1 12 : 00AM r R R R R r r r r r
[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM
[EXEC] : NEXT ITEM CLOCK SET AREA26 GMT 5.0 NewYork, Bogota DST OFF R DATE Y M D R 2002 JUL 4 5 : 30PM r R R R R r r r r r
[EXEC] : END STBY JUL 4 2002 5:30:00 PM SETUP MENU CLOCK SET USB STREAM LTR SIZE LANGUAGE DEMO MODE RETURN
[MENU] : END Note Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models. If you do not set the date and time
--:--:-- and --- -- ---- are recorded on the data code of the tape and the Memory Stick. When using your camcorder abroad Set the clock to the local time (p. 22). If you use the camcorder in a region where summer time is used Set DST SET to ON in the menu setting. Note on the time indicator The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle. 12:00 AM stands for midnight. 12:00 PM stands for noon. 21 Step 2 Setting the date and time Simple setting of clock by a time difference You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select AREA SET, DST SET* in the menu settings. See page 208 for more information.
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models. World time differences 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 13 14 16 17 18 AREA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Time difference GMT
+01:00
+02:00
+03:00
+03:30
+04:00
+04:30
+05:00
+05:30
+06:00
+06:30
+07:00
+08:00
+09:00
+09:30
+10:00 Area or country AREA Lisbon, London Berlin, Paris Helsinki, Cairo Moscow, Nairobi Tehran Abu Dhabi, Baku Kabul Karachi, Islamabad Calcutta, New Delhi Almaty, Dhaka Rangoon Bangkok, Jakarta HongKong, Singapore Seoul, Tokyo Adelaide, Darwin Melbourne, Sydney 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Time difference
+11:00
+12:00 12:00 11:00 10:00 09:00 08:00 07:00 06:00 05:00 04:00 03:30 03:00 02:00 01:00 Area or country Solomon Is Fiji, Wellington Eniwetok, Kwajalein Midway Is., Samoa Hawaii Alaska LosAngeles, Tijuana Denver, Arizona Chicago, MexicoCity New York, Bogota Santiago St. Johns Brasilia, Montevideo Fernando de Noronha Azores To adjust a time difference Select AREA SET in the menu setting, and select an area or a country you want to adjust to, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. 22 Step 3 Inserting a cassette
(1) Prepare the power supply.
(2) Slide OPEN/EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid. The cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.
(3) Push the center of the cassette back to insert. Insert the cassette straight as far as possible into the cassette compartment with the window facing up.
(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing on the cassette compartment. The cassette compartment automatically goes down.
(5) After the cassette compartment goes down completely, close the lid until it clicks. 2 OPEN/EJECT 3, 4 5 To eject a cassette Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3. Notes Do not press the cassette compartment down forcibly. Doing so may cause a malfunction. The cassette compartment may not be closed when you press any part of the cassette compartment other than the mark. When you use a cassette with cassette memory Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 220). To prevent accidental erasure Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 23 Step 4 Using the touch panel Your camcorder has operation buttons on the LCD screen. Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV50 only) to operate each function. This section describes how to operate the touch panel during recording or playing back images on a tape.
(1) Prepare the power supply (p. 15 to 19).
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) while pressing the small green button.
(4) Press FN. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(5) Press PAGE2 to go to PAGE2. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(6) Press a desired operation item. Refer to relevant pages of this manual for each function. 4 3 FN POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 5,6 When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA PAGE1 PAGE2 EXIT END SCH SPOT FOCUS DIG EFFT MEM M I X SPOT METER PAGE1 PAGE2 EXIT LCD BRT SELF TIMER 2 1 To return to FN Press EXIT. To execute settings Press OK. The display returns to PAGE1/PAGE2. To cancel settings Press OFF to return to PAGE1/PAGE2. 24 Step 4 Using the touch panel Notes When using the touch panel, press operation buttons with your thumb supporting the LCD panel from the back side of it or press those buttons lightly with your index finger. Do not press the LCD screen with sharp-pointed objects other than the stylus supplied. (DCR-TRV50 only) Do not press the LCD screen too hard. Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands. If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You can control the display with DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder. When operation buttons do not work even if you press them, an adjustment is required (CALIBRATION) (p. 230). When the LCD screen gets dirty, use the supplied cleaning cloth. When executing each item The green bar appears above the item. If the items are not available The color of the items changes to gray. Press FN to display the following buttons:
When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA PAGE1 PAGE2 END SCH, SPOT FOCUS, DIG EFFT, MEM MIX, SPOT METER LCD BRT, SELFTIMER When the POWER switch is set to VCR PAGE1 PAGE2 LCD BRT, DIG EFFT, PB ZOOM, PB, INDEX, END SCH PB, INDEX, DATA CODE See page 120 when the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 25 Recording Basics Recording a picture Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.
(1) Remove the lens cap by pressing both knobs on its sides and pull the lens cap string to fix it.
(2) Prepare the power supply and insert a cassette. See Step 1 to Step 3 for more information (p. 15 to 23).
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button. This sets your camcorder to the standby.
(4) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. The viewfinder automatically turns off.
(5) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator appears. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder lights up. To stop recording, press START/STOP again. 3 LOCK switch 1 POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 4 2 5 40min REC 0:00:01 Microphone Camera recording lamp 26 Recording a picture Notes Fasten the grip strap firmly. The recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed while recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 42). Note on recording Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode and in the LP
(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings (p. 206). In the LP mode, you can record 1.5 times as long as in the SP mode. When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing back the tape on your camcorder. i R e c o r d n g B a s i c s Note on the LOCK switch When you slide the LOCK switch to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the left as the default setting. To enable smooth transition Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder. However, check the following:
Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape. When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). When you use a cassette with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the END SEARCH (p. 38). If you leave your camcorder in the standby for five minutes while the cassette is inserted Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent battery and tape wear. To return to the standby, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then back to CAMERA. To start recording, press the START/STOP button again without switching the POWER switch. However, your camcorder does not turn off automatically while the cassette is not inserted. When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record in the LP mode The transition between scenes may not be smooth. The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes. The battery use time when you record using the LCD screen The battery time is slightly shorter than the shooting time using the viewfinder. 27 Recording a picture After recording
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
(2) Close the LCD panel.
(3) Eject the cassette.
(4) Remove the battery pack. Adjusting the LCD screen The LCD panel can be opened up to 90 degrees. The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens side. 180 90 When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically, and swing it into the camcorder body. Note When using the LCD screen except in the mirror mode, the viewfinder automatically turns off (p. 32). LCD screen When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight, the LCD screen may be difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder. When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel, make sure if the LCD panel is opened up to 90 degrees. 28 Recording a picture Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Press FN and select PAGE2. When you set the POWER switch to VCR, press FN to display PAGE1 (p. 24).
(2) Press LCD BRT. The screen to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen appears.
(3) Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen using /+.
: To dim
+ : To brighten
(4) Press OK to return to PAGE1/PAGE2. 1 FN 2,3 LCD BRT OK LCD BRT
+
the bar indicator OPEN To return to FN Press EXIT. LCD screen backlight You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings when using the battery pack (p. 202). i R e c o r d n g B a s i c s 29 Recording a picture Adjusting the viewfinder If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder. Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the images in the viewfinder come into sharp focus. Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever. The viewfinder lens adjustment lever Viewfinder backlight You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select VF B.L. in the menu settings when using the battery pack (p. 202). Attaching the supplied lens hood To record fine pictures under strong light, we recommend attaching the lens hood. Also the lens cap can be attached even with the lens hood on. Note You cannot attach filters or other objects onto the lens hood. If you forcibly attach these objects onto the lens hood, you will no longer be able to remove filters or other objects from the hood. When you use the filter (optional) The shadow of the lens hood may appear in the corners of the screen. 30 Recording a picture Using the zoom feature Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom. Using the zoom sparingly results in better-looking recordings. W : Wide-angle (subject appears farther away) T : Telephoto (subject appears closer) W T W T W T To use zoom greater than 10 Zoom greater than 10 is performed digitally. Digital zoom can be set to 20 or 120. To activate digital zoom, select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings (p. 201). The digital zoom is set to OFF as a default setting. The right side of the bar shows the digital zooming zone. The digital zooming zone appears when you select the digital zoom power in the menu settings. W T When you shoot close to a subject If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the W side until the focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch) away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch) away in the wide-angle position. Note on digital zoom The picture quality deteriorates as you move the power zoom lever towards the T side. When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) You cannot use the digital zoom. i R e c o r d n g B a s i c s 31 Recording a picture Shooting with the Mirror Mode This feature allows the camera subject to view him-or herself on the LCD screen. The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you look at the subject in the viewfinder. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Rotate the LCD screen 180 degrees. indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen. The Xz appears in the standby, and z appears in the recording. Some of other indicators appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed. Picture in the mirror mode The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal when recorded. During recording in the mirror mode ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work. FN appears mirror-reversed in the viewfinder. When you press FN The does not appear on the screen. 32 Recording a picture Indicators displayed in the recording Indicators are not recorded on tapes. Remaining battery time Cassette memory This appears when using a cassette with cassette memory. Recording mode STBY/REC 50min REC 0:00:01 45min Time code/Tape counter i R e c o r d n g B a s i c s JUL 4 2002 12:05:56PM FN Remaining tape This appears after you insert a cassette and record or play back for a while. FN button Press this button to display operation buttons on the LCD screen. Time The time is displayed about five seconds after the power is turned on. Date The date is displayed about five seconds after the power is turned on. Remaining battery time indicator during recording The remaining battery time indicator roughly indicates the continuous recording time. The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed. Time code The time code indicates the recording or playback time, 0:00:00 (hours : minutes :
seconds) in CAMERA and 0:00:00:00 (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR. You cannot rewrite only the time code. Remaining tape indicator The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape. Recording data The recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed while recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 42). 33 Recording a picture Shooting backlit subjects BACK LIGHT When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a light background, use the backlight function. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only), press BACK LIGHT. The . indicator appears on the screen. To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again. BACK LIGHT When shooting backlit subjects If you press EXPOSURE or SPOT METER, the backlight function will be canceled
(p. 68). Shooting in the dark NightShot/Super NightShot/Color Slow Shutter Using NightShot The NightShot enables you to shoot a subject in a dark place. For example, you can satisfactorily record the environment of nocturnal animals for observation when you use this function. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only), slide NIGHTSHOT to ON. The slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF. and NIGHTSHOT indicators flash on the screen. To cancel the NightShot, NIGHTSHOT OFF ON COLOR SLOW S SUPER NS NightShot Light emitter 34 Recording a picture Using Super NightShot The Super NightShot makes subjects more than 16 times brighter than those recorded in the NightShot.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, slide NIGHTSHOT to ON. The and NIGHTSHOT indicators flash on the screen.
(2) Press SUPER NS. The and SUPER NIGHTSHOT indicators flash on the screen. To return the NightShot, press SUPER NS again. Using NightShot Light The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable the NightShot Light, set N.S. LIGHT in to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.) Using Color Slow Shutter The Color Slow Shutter enables you to record color images in a dark place.
(1) Slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.
(2) Press COLOR SLOW S. and COLOR SLOW SHUTTER indicators flash on the screen. The To cancel the Color Slow Shutter, press COLOR SLOW S again. Notes Do not use the NightShot in bright places (e.g. the outdoors in the daytime). This may cause your camcorder to malfunction. When you keep NIGHTSHOT set to ON in normal recording, the picture may be recorded in incorrect or unnatural colors. If focusing is difficult when using the NightShot, focus manually. While using the NightShot, you cannot use the following functions:
Exposure PROGRAM AE White balance HOLOGRAM AF While using the Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter The shutter speed is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness. At this time, moving pictures may slow down. While using the Super NightShot, you cannot use the following functions:
Fader Digital effect PROGRAM AE Exposure Recording still images on a Memory Stick in the tape recording or tape recording standby White balance Flexible Spot Meter Spot Focus Recording with the flash i R e c o r d n g B a s i c s 35 Recording a picture When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) You cannot use the following functions:
Super NightShot Color Slow Shutter NightShot Light NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are invisible. The maximum shooting distance using the NightShot Light is about 3 m (10 feet). While using the Color Slow Shutter, you cannot use the following functions:
Fader Digital effect PROGRAM AE Exposure Recording still images on a Memory Stick in the tape recording or tape recording standby Flexible Spot Meter Spot Focus Recording with the flash In total darkness The Color Slow Shutter may not work normally. 36 Recording a picture Self-timer recording Recording with the self-timer starts in 10 seconds automatically. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) In the standby, press FN and select PAGE2 (p. 24).
(2) Press SELFTIMER. The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(3) Press START/STOP. The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically. START/STOP 1 FN START/STOP To stop the countdown Press START/STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/STOP again. To cancel the self-timer Press SELFTIMER so that the your camcorder is in the standby. You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.
(self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen while Note The self-timer is automatically canceled when:
The self-timer recording is finished. The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR. When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) You can also record still images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer (p. 134). i R e c o r d n g B a s i c s 37 Checking recordings END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/Rec Review You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture or shoot so that the transition between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record is smooth. FN EDITSEARCH END SEARCH You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.
(1) In the standby, press FN to display PAGE1 (p. 24).
(2) Press END SCH. The last five seconds of the recorded section are played back and your camcorder returns to the standby. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones. To return to FN Press EXIT. To stop searching Press END SCH again. EDITSEARCH You can search for the next recording start point. Hold down the EDITSEARCH in the standby. The recorded portion is played back. 7 : To go backward
+
: To go forward Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/STOP, recording begins from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound. 38 Checking recordings END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/Rec Review Rec Review You can check the last recorded section. Press the 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in the standby. The section you have stopped most recently will be played back for a few seconds, and then your camcorder will return to the standby. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones. End search When you use a cassette without cassette memory, the end search function does not work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a cassette with cassette memory, the end search works even once you eject the cassette. i R e c o r d n g B a s i c s If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The end search may not work correctly. 39 Playback Basics Playing back a tape You can monitor the playback picture on the screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can control playback using the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert the recorded tape.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.
(3) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape.
(5) Press N to start playback.
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.
: To turn down
+ : To turn up When you close the LCD panel, sound is muted. 6 VOLUME 2 P O W E R VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 3 1 4 5 REW PLAY To stop playback Press x. 40 Playing back a tape When monitoring on the LCD screen You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD screen facing out. If you leave the power on for a long time Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction. When you open or close the LCD panel Make sure that the LCD panel is set vertically. P l a y b a c k B a s i c s 41 Playing back a tape To display the screen indicators Display function Press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder or DISPLAY on the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder. The indicators disappear on the screen. To make the indicators appear, press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL or DISPLAY again. DATA CODE DISPLAY DISPLAY/
TOUCH PANEL About date/time and various settings Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) (data code). Follow the steps below to display the data code using the touch panel or the Remote Commander. Using the touch panel 1 Set the POWER switch to VCR, then play back a tape. 2 Press FN and select PAGE2. 3 Press DATA CODE. DATACODE OFF OK CAM DATA DATE DATA 4 Select CAM DATA or DATE DATA, then press 5 Press EXIT. OK. Using the Remote Commander Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander in the playback. The display changes as follows when you press the DATA CODE on the Remote Commander:
date/time t various settings (SteadyShot, exposure, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture value) t no indicator 42 Playing back a tape Date/time Various settings 50min 0:00:23:01 40min 0:00:23:01 JUL 4 2002 12:05:56 AM AUTO 60 AWB F1.8 9dB
[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]
[f]
[g]
[a] Tape counter
[b] SteadyShot OFF
[c] Exposure mode
[d] White balance
[e] Gain
[f] Shutter speed
[g] Aperture value To not display various settings Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 208). The display changes as follows when you press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander:
date/time y no indicator Various settings Various settings are your camcorders information when you have recorded. In the recording, the various settings will not be displayed. When you use the data code, bars (-- -- --) appear if:
A blank portion of the tape is being played back. The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise. The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set. Data code When you connect your camcorder to the TV, the data code appears on the TV screen. Remaining battery time indicator during playback The indicator indicates the approximate continuous playback time. The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are playing back. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery time to be displayed. P l a y b a c k B a s i c s 43 Playing back a tape Various playback modes To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR. To play back pause (viewing a still picture) Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press N or X. To advance the tape Press M in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N. To rewind the tape Press m in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N. To change the playback direction Press To resume normal playback, press N. on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction. To locate a scene monitoring the picture (picture search) Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the button. To monitor high-speed pictures while advancing or rewinding the tape (skip scan) Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume rewinding or advancing, release the button. To view the picture at slow speed (slow playback) Press y on the Remote Commander during playback. For slow playback in the reverse direction, press playback, press N.
, then press y on the Remote Commander. To resume normal To view pictures at double speed Press 2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the reverse direction, press normal playback, press N.
, then press 2 on the Remote Commander. To resume To view pictures frame-by-frame Press C on the Remote Commander in the playback pause. For frame-by-frame playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N. To search the last scene recorded (END SEARCH) Press FN, then press END SCH in the stop mode. The last five seconds recorded portion is played back and then stopped. 44 Playing back a tape In the various playback modes Sound is muted. The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback. When the playback pause lasts for five minutes Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press N. Slow playback The slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder. However, this function does not work for an output signal through the DV IN/OUT jack. When you play back a tape in reverse Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction. P l a y b a c k B a s i c s 45 Viewing the recording on TV Connect your camcorder to your TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to watch playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the video control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the screen. When monitoring playback pictures on the TV screen, we recommend that you power your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC power adaptor (p. 19). Refer to the operating instructions of your TV. Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR. AUDIO/VIDEO S VIDEO White IN Yellow S VIDEO
: Signal flow A/V connecting cable (supplied) Red If your TV is already connected to a VCR VIDEO AUDIO TV Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR by using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE. If your TV or VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. If you connect the white plug, the sound is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the sound is R
(right) signal. If your TV has an S video jack Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. To display the screen indicators on TV Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings (p. 209). Then, press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder. To turn the screen indicators off, press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder again. 46 Advanced Recording Operations Recording still images on a Memory Stick during tape recording You can record still images on a Memory Stick in the tape recording or tape recording standby. You can also record still images on a tape (p. 52). Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder (p. 119). Set PHOTO REC in to MEMORY in the menu settings (The default setting is MEMORY). A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i
(1) In the standby, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears. The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.
(2) Press PHOTO deeper. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the Memory Stick.
[a][b]
SFN 640 1 / 6 CAPTURE SFN 640 1 2 O T O P H O T O P H
[a]: Number of recorded images
[b]: Approximate number of images that can be recorded on the Memory Stick Notes Do not shake or strike your camcorder when you record still images. The image may fluctuate. You cannot record still images on a Memory Stick during following operations indicator flashes on the screen.):
(
Wide mode Fader Picture effect Digital effect Super NightShot Color Slow Shutter MEMORY MIX Memory Stick For details, see page 117 for more information. 47 Recording still images on a Memory Stick during tape recording Image size of still images Image size is automatically set to 640 480. When you want to record still images in different size, use the Memory Photo recording
(p. 126). When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA You cannot select image quality. The image quality when you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) is used. (The default setting is SUPER FINE). During and after recording still images on a Memory Stick Your camcorder continues recording on tape. To record still images using the Remote Commander Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records the image on the screen. To record still images on a Memory Stick during tape recording You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The image when you press PHOTO will be recorded on the Memory Stick. To record images with higher quality We recommend that you use the Memory Photo recording (p. 126). Title The title cannot be recorded. 48 Recording still images on a Memory Stick during tape recording Recording images with the flash The flash pops up automatically. The default setting is auto (no indicator). To change the flash mode, press the the screen.
(flash) repeatedly until the flash mode indicator appears on
(flash) Each press of
(flash) changes the indicator as follows:
t t No indicator t Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce red-eye. Forced flash:
No flash:
The flash fires regardless of the surrounding brightness. The flash does not fire. The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 200). Try recording various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL. A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i Notes Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may block the light from the flash or cause lens shadow to appear. You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.
(auto red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired effect depending on individual differences, the distance to the subject, the subject not looking at the pre-
recording flash or other conditions. A flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location. When you record images with the flash, sound may not be recorded clearly. When recording with the flash, it takes longer to prepare for image capture. This is because your camcorder starts to charge power for firing after the flash pops up. Darken the surroundings by covering the lens, and press PHOTO lightly so that your camcorder starts to charge power after the flash pops up. If it is not easy to focus on the subject automatically, for example, when recording in the dark, use the focal distance information (p. 70) for focusing manually. When you record images with the flash The allowed shooting distance is shorter than when you record on a Memory Stick in Memory Photo recording. 49 Recording still images on a Memory Stick during tape recording If you leave your camcorder for five or more minutes after disconnecting the power supply Your camcorder returns to the default setting (auto). You cannot shoot images with the flash during the following operations:
Fader Recording The flash does not fire even if you select auto (no indicator) and reduction) during the following operations:
Exposure Flexible Spot Meter NightShot Spotlight of PROGRAM AE Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE Landscape of PROGRAM AE
(auto red-eye When you use an external flash (optional) which does not have the auto red-eye reduction You cannot select the auto red-eye reduction. 50
1 | manual2 | Users Manual | 1.71 MiB | / July 03 2002 |
Recording still images on a Memory Stick during tape recording Self-timer recording You can record still images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder (p. 119). Set PHOTO REC in to MEMORY in the menu settings.(The default setting is MEMORY.)
(1) In the standby, press FN and select PAGE2.
(2) Press SELFTIMER. The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then the recording starts automatically. PHOTO 1 FN 3 O T O P H To cancel the self-timer Press SELFTIMER so that the your camcorder is in the standby. You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.
(self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen while Note The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:
The self-timer recording is finished. The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR. Self-timer recording You can operate the self-timer recording only during the recording standby. A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 51 Recording still images on a tape Tape Photo recording You can record still images such as photographs on tapes. You can record about 510 images in the SP mode and about 765 images in the LP mode on a 60-minute tape.
(1) In the standby, set PHOTO REC in
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears. to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 201). The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image on the screen is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound during those seven seconds is also recorded. The still image is displayed on the screen until recording is completed. CAPTURE 2 3 O T O P H O T O P H Recording images with the flash For the details, see page 49. Recording images with self-timer
(1) Set PHOTO REC in
(2) Follow steps 1 and 3 on page 51. to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 201). 52 Recording still images on a tape Tape Photo recording Notes During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting. When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. The image may fluctuate. You cannot use PHOTO during the following operations (
indicator flashes on the screen):
Fader Digital effect If you record a moving subject with the tape photo recording When you play back the still image on other equipment, the image may fluctuate. This is not a malfunction. To use the tape photo recording with the Remote Commander Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder records an image on the screen immediately. To use the tape photo recording during the normal camera recording You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. Press PHOTO deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds, and your camcorder returns to the standby. To record clear still images with little unsteadiness We recommend that you record on Memory Sticks using the Memory Photo recording. When playing back images recorded with the flash on other equipment These images may flicker. A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 53 Adjusting the white balance manually You can manually adjust and set the white balance. This adjustment makes white subjects look white and allows more natural color balance. Normally white balance is automatically adjusted.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 with the SEL/PUSH EXEC only). Press MENU, then select WHT BAL in dial (p. 200).
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired white balance, then press dial. HOLD :
Recording a single-colored subject or background When recording a sunset/sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon OUTDOOR :
signs, or fireworks Under a color-matching fluorescent lamp n INDOOR :
Where lighting condition changes quickly Excessively bright places such as studios Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps 1 STBY AUTO HOLD OUTDOOR INDOOR MANUAL SET P EFFECT FLASH LVL WHT BAL N.S. LIGHT AUTO SHTR RETURN
[MENU] : END MENU To return to the automatic white balance Set WHT BAL to AUTO in the menu settings. If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting We recommend that you record in the INDOOR. When you record under fluorescent lighting Use the automatic white balance or HOLD. Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly in the INDOOR. In the automatic white balance Point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment when:
You detach the battery for replacement. You take your camcorder outdoors from inside a house holding the exposure, or vice versa. In the HOLD white balance Set the white balance to AUTO and reset to HOLD after a few seconds when:
You change the PROGRAM AE. You take your camcorder outdoors from inside a house, or vice versa. 54 Using the wide mode You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE). If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1/ID-2 system, the screen size is automatically selected. Black bands appear on the screen during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a]. The picture during playback on a normal TV [b] or on a wide-screen TV [c] is compressed in the longwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d].
[a]
16:9WIDE
[b]
[c]
[d]
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select 16:9WIDE in
, then press the dial (p. 201).
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial. A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 2 ON CAMERA SET D ZOOM PHOTO REC 16:9WIDE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC INT. REC RETURN
[MENU] : END MENU To cancel the wide mode Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings. 55 Using the wide mode In the wide mode You cannot select the following functions:
Recording still images on a Memory Stick in the tape recording or tape recording standby OLD MOVIE BOUNCE During recording You cannot select or cancel the wide mode. When you cancel the wide mode, set your camcorder to the standby and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings. Connection for a TV Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full size when:
You connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ID-2) system. You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on the TV. ID-1 system The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio (screen horizontal/vertical ratio) information (16:9, 4:3, or letter box) with video signals. ID-2 system The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using an A/V connecting cable. 56 Using the fader You can fade in or out to give your recording a more professional appearance.
[a]
STBY REC FADER M. FADER
(mosaic) BOUNCE1) 2) OVERLAP2) WIPE2) DOT2) A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i
[b]
STBY REC MONOTONE When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color. When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white. 1) You can use the bounce when D ZOOM is set to OFF in the menu settings. 2) Fade in only. 57 Using the fader
(1) When fading in [a]
In the standby, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes. When fading out [b]
In the recording, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes. The indicator changes as follows:
FADER t M. FADER t BOUNCE t MONOTONE
(no indicator)T DOT T WIPE T OVERLAP The last selected fader is indicated first of all.
(2) Press START/STOP. The fader indicator stops flashing. After fade in/out ends, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal mode. START/STOP 1 FADER FADER To cancel the fader Before pressing START/STOP, press FADER until the indicator disappears. Note You cannot use the following functions while using the fader. Also, you cannot use the fader while using the following functions:
Digital effect Super NightShot Color Slow Shutter Tape photo recording Recording still images on a Memory Stick in the tape recording or tape recording standby Recording with the flash Interval recording Frame recording When you select OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. While the image is being stored, the indicators flash fast, and the playback picture disappears. At this stage, the picture may not be recorded clearly, depending on the tape condition. 58 Using the fader When you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) You cannot use the fader. While using the bounce, you cannot use the following functions:
Focus Zoom Picture effect Exposure Flexible Spot Meter Note on the bounce The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the following mode or functions:
When D ZOOM is activated in the menu settings Wide mode Picture effect PROGRAM AE A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 59 Using special effects Picture effect You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV. NEG. ART [a] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed. SEPIA :
B&W :
SOLARIZE [b] : The light intensity becomes clearer, to make the picture look more like The picture appears in sepia. The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white). an illustration. The picture expands vertically. SLIM [c] :
STRETCH [d] : The picture expands horizontally. PASTEL [e] :
The contrast of the picture is emphasized, to make the picture look more like an animated cartoon. The picture appears mosaic-patterned. MOSAIC [f] :
[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]
[f]
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. Press MENU, then select P EFFECT in with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial (p. 200).
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect, then press the dial. 1 MANUAL SET P EFFECT FLASH LVL WHT BAL N. S. LIGHT AUTO SHTR RETURN
[MENU] : END OFF NEG. ART SEPIA B&W SOLARIZE SLIM STRETCH PASTEL MOSAIC MENU To cancel the picture effect Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings. The following functions do not work during the picture effect Recording still images on a Memory Stick in the tape recording or tape recording standby OLD MOVIE of digital effect Bounce When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) Picture effect is automatically canceled. 60 Using special effects Digital effect You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions. Sound is recorded normally. STILL You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture. FLASH (FLASH MOTION) You can record still images successively at constant intervals. LUMI. (LUMINANCE KEY) You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture. TRAIL You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left. SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER) You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow shutter is good for recording dark pictures more brightly. OLD MOVIE You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically sets the wide mode to ON and picture effect to SEPIA, and sets the appropriate shutter speed. Still image Moving picture STILL LUMI. Still image Moving picture A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 61 Using special effects Digital effect
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, press FN to display PAGE1.
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a desired digital effect appears.
(3) Press a desired digital effect. In the STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is stored in memory.
(4) Press /+ to adjust the effect.
: To reduce the effect
+: To increase the effect Items to be adjusted STILL FLASH LUMI. The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving picture The interval of frame by frame playback The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be swapped with a moving picture The vanishing time of the incidental image TRAIL SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the shutter speed. OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary
(5) Press OK to return to PAGE1. 1 FN 2~4 DIG EFFT DIG EFFT DIG EFFT OFF SLOW SHTR STILL OK OFF OK OLD MOVIE FLASH LUMI. TRAIL LUMI.
+
The bar appears when setting following digital effect : STILL, FLASH, LUMI., TRAIL. To return to FN Press EXIT. To cancel the digital effect Press OFF to return to PAGE1. 62 Using special effects Digital effect Notes The following functions do not work during digital effect:
Fader Super NightShot Color Slow Shutter Tape photo recording Recording still images on a Memory Stick in the tape recording or tape recording The PROGRAM AE does not work in the slow shutter. The following functions do not work in the old movie:
standby Wide mode Picture effect PROGRAM AE When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) Digital effect is automatically canceled. When recording in the slow shutter Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod. Shutter speed Shutter speed number SLOW SHTR 1 SLOW SHTR 2 SLOW SHTR 3 SLOW SHTR 4 Shutter speed 1/30 1/15 1/8 1/4 A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 63 Using the PROGRAM AE You can select the PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) to suit your specific shooting requirements. Spotlight This mode prevents peoples faces, for example, from appearing excessively white when shooting subjects lit by strong light in the theater. Soft portrait This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as people or flowers. Sports lesson This mode minimizes camera-shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf. Beach & ski This mode prevents peoples faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light, such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope. Sunset & moon This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general night views, fireworks displays and neon signs. Landscape This mode is for when you are recording distant subjects such as mountains, and prevents your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you are recording a subject behind glass or a screen. 64 Using the PROGRAM AE
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only), press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator appears.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired PROGRAM AE. The indicator changes as follows:
y y y y y AE PROGRAM 1 2 To cancel the PROGRAM AE Press PROGRAM AE. A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 65 Using the PROGRAM AE Notes Because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance, you cannot take close-ups in the following modes:
Spotlight Sports lesson Beach & ski Your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects in the following modes:
The following functions do not work in the PROGRAM AE:
Sunset & moon Landscape Color Slow Shutter Slow Shutter Old movie Bounce When you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only), Sports lesson does not work. (The indicator flashes.) The PROGRAM AE does not work in the following cases. (The indicator flashes.) To set NIGHTSHOT to ON To record images on a Memory Stick using the MEMORY MIX. While WHT BAL is set to AUTO in the menu settings The white balance is adjusted even if the PROGRAM AE is selected. You can adjust the following functions while using the PROGRAM AE Exposure Flexible Spot Meter If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or mercury lamp Flickering or changes in color may occur in the following modes. If this happens, turn the PROGRAM AE off. Soft portrait Sports lesson 66 Adjusting the exposure manually You can manually adjust and set the exposure. Normally the exposure is automatically adjusted. Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:
When the subject is backlit When shooting subjects and dark backgrounds When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only), press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator appears.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness. 2 EXPOSURE To return to the automatic exposure Press EXPOSURE. When you adjust the exposure manually, the following functions do not work:
Color Slow Shutter Backlight Your camcorder automatically returns to the automatic exposure:
If you change the PROGRAM AE. If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON. A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 67 Using the spot light-metering Flexible Spot Meter You can take a picture with the appropriate exposure automatically for just the point you want to focus on and with its exposure fixed. Use the Flexible Spot Meter in the following cases:
The subject is backlit. When there is strong contrast between the subject and background such as with a subject that is on stage and lighted by a spotlight.
(1) When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only), press FN to display PAGE1.
(2) Press SPOT METER. The SPOT METER screen appears.
(3) Press the desired area in the frame on the LCD screen. The SPOT METER indicator flashes on the LCD screen. The exposure of the point you selected is adjusted.
(4) Press OK to return to PAGE1. 1 FN 2~4 SPOT METER PAGE1 PAGE2 EXIT SPOT METER END SCH SPOT FOCUS DIG EFFT MEM M I X SPOT METER AUTO OK To return to FN Press EXIT. To return to the automatic exposure Press AUTO to return to PAGE1. The following functions do not work during Flexible Spot Meter Color Slow Shutter Backlight Exposure If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON Your camcorder automatically returns from the Flexible Spot Meter to automatic exposure. 68 Focusing manually You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases. Normally, focus is automatically adjusted. The autofocus is not effective when shooting Subjects through glass coated with water droplets Horizontal stripes Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in the background. Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod.
(1) Set FOCUS to MAN when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). The 9 indicator appears.
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus. Focus ring 2 FOCUS switch To return to the autofocus Set FOCUS to AUTO. To record distant subjects When you set FOCUS to INFINITY, the lens focuses on and you release FOCUS, your camcorder returns to the manual focus. Use this mode when your camcorder focuses on near objects even though you are trying to shoot a distant object. indicator appears. When A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 69 Focusing manually To focus precisely It is easier to focus on subjects if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the W (wide-angle) after focusing at the T (telephoto) position. When you shoot close to the subject Focus at the end of the W (wide-angle) position. 9 changes as follows:
when recording a distant subject when the subject is too close to focus on Focal distance information is displayed for about three seconds on the screen in the following cases:
When switching the focus adjustment mode from autofocus to manual When turning the focus ring Focal distance information This information aids focusing if it is not easy to focus on the subject, for example, when recording in the dark. Use this information as a rough guide to get a sharp focus. You cannot get correct information if you have attached a conversion lens (optional) to your camcorder. 70 Using the spot focus Spot Focus You can take a picture with the appropriate focus automatically for just the point you want to focus on and with its focus fixed.
(1) When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only), set FOCUS to MAN.
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(3) Press SPOT FOCUS. The SPOT FOCUS screen appears.
(4) Press the desired area in the frame on the LCD screen. The 9 indicator flashes on the LCD screen. The focus of the point you selected is adjusted.
(5) Press OK to return to PAGE1. 2 FN 3~5 SPOT FOCUS PAGE1 PAGE2 EXIT SPOT FOCUS SPOT FOCUS DIG EFFT MEM M I X END SCH SPOT METER OK FOCUS switch To return to FN Press EXIT. To return to the autofocus Set FOCUS to AUTO. The following functions do not work during Spot Focus:
Exposure Fader Backlight PROGRAM AE Focal distance information It is not displayed on the screen. A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i 71 Interval recording You can make a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically record and standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for flowering, gradual appearances, etc., with this function. Example 1 s
[a]
[b]
[c]
1 s 9 min 59 s 9 min 59 s 10 min 10 min
[a] REC TIME
[b]Waiting time
[c] INTERVAL
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INT. REC in
, then press the dial (p. 201).
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set INTERVAL and REC TIME. 1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial. 2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then press the dial. The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN 3 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial. 4 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then press the dial. The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC 5 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The INTERVAL indicator flashes.
(6) Press START/STOP to start interval recording. The INTERVAL indicator lights up. 72 Interval recording 6 5 4 STBY INTERVAL MENU STBY CAMERA SET D ZOOM PHOTO REC 16:9WIDE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC INT. REC RETURN ON
[MENU] : END 2 3 STBY CAMERA SET D ZOOM PHOTO REC 16:9WIDE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC INT. REC RETURN
[MENU] : END ON OFF SET CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL REC TIME RETURN STBY 30SEC
[MENU] : END CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL REC TIME RETURN STBY 30SEC
[MENU] : END CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL REC TIME RETURN STBY 0.5SEC CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL REC TIME RETURN STBY 30SEC 1MIN 5MIN 10MIN
[MENU] : END CAMERA SET INT. REC INTERVAL REC TIME RETURN STBY 0.5SEC 1SEC 1.5SEC 2SEC
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END A d v a n c e d R e c o r d n g O p e r a t i o n s i To cancel the interval recording Perform either of the following:
Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings. Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA. To perform normal recording during the watinig time You can perform normal recording only once during the waiting time. Press START/
STOP, and the indicator flashes and normal recording starts. To stop normal recording, press START/STOP again. To restart interval recording, perform step 6. On recording time There may be a discrepancy in the recording time of up to +/ six frames from the selected time. When pressing START/STOP during recording time Interval recording stops. To restart it, perform step 6. 73 Frame by frame recording Frame recording You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording. To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a frame recording. We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote Commander after step 4.
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select FRAME REC in
, then press the dial (p. 201).
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(3) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The FRAME REC indicator lights up.
(4) Press START/STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.
(5) Move the subject, and repeat step 4. 4 MENU 2 STBY CAMERA SET D ZOOM PHOTO REC 16:9WIDE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC INT. REC RETURN OFF ON STBY CAMERA SET D ZOOM PHOTO REC 16:9WIDE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC INT. REC RETURN ON
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END To cancel the frame recording Perform either of the following:
Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings. Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA. Note The remaining tape time is not indicated correctly if you use this function continuously. When using the frame recording The last recorded frame is longer than other frames. 74 Advanced Playback Operations Playing back tapes with picture effect During playback, you can process a scene using the following picture effect:
NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press MENU, then select P EFFECT in with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 200).
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect, then press the dial. For details of each picture effect, see page 60. 1 MANUAL SET P EFFECT RETURN OFF NEG. ART SEPIA B&W SOLARIZE
[MENU] : END MENU To cancel the picture effect Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings. Notes You cannot process externally input scenes using picture effect. You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the image using picture effect. However, you can record images on a Memory Stick
(p. 135, 147), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player. Pictures processed by picture effect Pictures processed by picture effect is not output through the DV IN/OUT jack. When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back The picture effect is automatically canceled. A d v a n c e d P l a y b a c k O p e r a t i o n s 75 Playing back tapes with digital effect During playback, you can process a scene using the following digital effect:
STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a desired digital effect appears.
(3) Press a desired digital effect. In the STILL or LUMI., the picture where you select the mode is stored in memory as a still image.
(4) Press /+ to adjust the effect. Refer to page 62 for details.
(5) Press OK to return to PAGE2. 1 FN 2,3 DIG EFFT DIG EFFT OFF OK STILL FLASH LUMI. TRAIL To return to FN Press EXIT. To cancel the digital effect Press OFF to return to PAGE2. Notes You cannot process externally input scenes using digital effect. You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the image using digital effect. However, you can record images on a Memory Stick
(p. 135, 147), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player. Pictures processed by digital effect Pictures processed by digital effect is not output through the DV IN/OUT jack. When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back Digital effect is automatically canceled. 76 Enlarging images recorded on tapes Tape PB ZOOM You can enlarge playback images recorded on tapes. Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded on Memory Sticks (p. 164).
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.
(2) Press PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM screen appears.
(3) Press the area you want to enlarge in the frame on the PB ZOOM screen. The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback image is enlarged approximately at twice the size. If you press the other area again, the area moves to the center of the screen.
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever. You can enlarge the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its size. W: Decreases the zoom ratio. T: Increases the zoom ratio. PB ZOOM 5.0 T END 4 W END 1 FN 2 PB ZOOM PB ZOOM To cancel the PB ZOOM Press END. A d v a n c e d P l a y b a c k O p e r a t i o n s 77 Enlarging images recorded on tapes Tape PB ZOOM Notes You cannot process externally input scenes using the PB ZOOM. You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the image using the tape PB ZOOM. However, you can record images on a VCR using your camcorder as a player. You cannot record moving pictures on a Memory Stick on your camcorder when you have processed the picture using the tape PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM is automatically canceled when you activate the following:
Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Stop playback. Press MENU. Insert a Memory Stick. Pictures in the PB ZOOM Pictures in the PB ZOOM are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack and the
(USB) jack. In the PB ZOOM If you press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen. Edge of the enlarged image The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen. 78 Quickly locating a scene ZERO SET MEMORY Your camcorder goes forward or backward to automatically stop at a desired scene having a tape counter value of 0:00:00. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) In the playback, press DISPLAY when the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator does not appear.
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape counter shows 0:00:00 and then starts counting. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes.
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counters zero point. The tape stops automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears, and the time code appears.
(5) Press N. Playback starts from the counters zero point. DISPLAY m x ZERO SET MEMORY N Notes When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory will be canceled. There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears when you press FN. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The zero set memory may not work correctly. A d v a n c e d P l a y b a c k O p e r a t i o n s 79 Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title TITLE SEARCH If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of recorded tape by title. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Before operation Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the TITLE SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH PHOTO SCAN
(no indicator) T
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that you selected. 2 SEARCH MODE TITLE SEARCH 1 HELLO!
2 CONGRATULATIONS!
3 HAPPY NEW YEAR!
4 PRESENT 5 GOOD MORNING 6 WEDDING 3
. >
TITLE SEARCH 3 HAPPY NEW YEAR!
4 PRESENT 5 GOOD MORNING 6 WEDDING 7 NIGHT 8 BASEBALL
[b] [a]
[a] Actual point you are trying to search for
[b] Present point on the tape To stop searching Press x. If you use a cassette without cassette memory You cannot superimpose or search a title. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The title search may not work correctly. To superimpose a title See page 110. 80 Searching a recording by date DATE SEARCH You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start playback from that point (date search). Use a cassette with cassette memory for convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each recording date. Searching for the date by using cassette memory Before operation You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory. Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH PHOTO SCAN
(no indicator) T
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected date. 2 SEARCH MODE DATE SEARCH 1 SEP/ 5/02 2 SEP/ 6/02 3 DEC/24/02 4 JAN/ 1/03 5 FEB/ 11/03 6 APR/ 29/03 3
. >
DATE SEARCH 1 SEP/ 5/02 2 SEP/ 6/02 3 DEC/24/02 4 JAN/ 1/03 5 FEB/ 11/03 6 APR/ 29/03
[b] [a]
[a] Actual point you are trying to search for
[b] Present point on the tape To stop searching Press x. A d v a n c e d P l a y b a c k O p e r a t i o n s 81 Searching a recording by date DATE SEARCH Note If one days recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find the point where the recording date changes. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The date search may not work correctly. Cassette memory The tape with cassette memory can hold six recording dates. If you search among seven or more dates, see Searching for the date without using cassette memory below. Searching for the date without using cassette memory
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then select CM SEARCH in to OFF with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 205).
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)
(4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press
> on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or next date. To stop searching Press x. 82 Searching for a photo PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN You can search for a still image you have recorded on a tape (PHOTO SEARCH). You can also search for still images one after another and display each image for five seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (PHOTO SCAN). Use the Remote Commander for these operations. Use this function to check or edit still images. Searching for a photo by using cassette memory Before operation You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory. Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH PHOTO SCAN
(no indicator) T
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date that you selected. 2 SEARCH MODE PHOTO SEARCH 1 SEP/ 5/02 5:30PM 2 SEP/ 6/02 8:50AM 3 DEC/24/02 10:30AM 4 JAN/ 1/03 11:25PM 5 FEB/ 11/03 4:11PM 6 APR/ 29/03 1:45PM 3
. >
PHOTO SEARCH 1 SEP/ 5/02 5:30PM 2 SEP/ 6/02 8:50AM 3 DEC/24/02 10:30AM 4 JAN/ 1/03 11:25PM 5 FEB/ 11/03 4:11PM 6 APR/ 29/03 1:45PM
[b] [a]
MENU
[a] Actual point you are trying to search for
[b] Present point on the tape To stop searching Press x. A d v a n c e d P l a y b a c k O p e r a t i o n s 83 Searching for a photo PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN Searching for a photo without using cassette memory
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CM SEARCH in to OFF, then press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)
(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the photo for playback. Each time you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or next photo. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo. To stop searching Press x. 84 Searching for a photo PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN Scanning photo
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the PHOTO SCAN indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH* t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
(no indicator) T PHOTO SCAN
* Displayed only when CM SEARCH is set to ON in the menu settings.
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander. Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically. 2 SEARCH MODE PHOTO 00 SCAN 3 To stop scanning Press x. If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The photo search/photo scan may not work correctly. The available number of photos that can be searched using the cassette memory The available number is up to 12 photos. However, you can search 13 photos or more using the photo scan. A d v a n c e d P l a y b a c k O p e r a t i o n s 85 Editing Dubbing a tape Using the A/V connecting cable You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as a player. Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Before operation Set DISPLAY in Press the following buttons to make the indicator disappear so that they will not be to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.) superimposed on the edited tape:
On your camcorder:
DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL, DATA CODE On the Remote Commander:
DISPLAY, DATA CODE, SEARCH MODE
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE. Connect the A/V connecting cable to AUDIO/VIDEO jack. Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR. White S VIDEO Yellow IN AUDIO/VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO VCR
: Signal flow A/V connecting cable (supplied) Red When you have finished dubbing a tape Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. 86 Dubbing a tape You can edit on VCRs that support the following systems:
8 mm, Betamax, Hi8, VHS, ED Betamax, S-VHS, mini DV, VHSC, DV, S-VHSC, Digital8, MICRO MV If your VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected, the right channel audio is output. If your VCR has an S video jack Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. E d i t i n g 87 Dubbing a tape Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) to DV IN/OUT jack on your camcorder and to DV IN on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory or letters on the Memory Stick index screen. Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input position if the VCR is equipped with the input selector.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE. Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR. DV IN/OUT DV DV IN
: Signal flow i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) When you have finished dubbing a tape Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) See page 225 for more information about i.LINK. Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack. If you record a playback pause picture with the DV IN/OUT jack The recorded picture becomes rough. Also, when you play back the picture using other video equipment, the picture may jitter. 88 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating the VCR. Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs. Your camcorder can also dub on Memory Sticks. See page 151 for more information. Unwanted scene Unwanted scene Switch the order Before operating the Digital program editing on tapes recorded on other equipment Step 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 89). Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation (p. 90, 94). Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 95). When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip steps 2 and 3. Using the Digital program editing on tapes recorded on other equipment Operation 1 Making a program (p. 97). Operation 2 Performing the program (dubbing a tape) (p. 99). Note When editing digital video on tapes, the operation signals cannot be sent with LANC. Step 1: Connecting the VCR You can connect both an A/V connecting cable and an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable). When you use the A/V connecting cable, connect the devices as illustrated on page 86. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), connect the devices as illustrated on page 88. If you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. E d i t i n g 89 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) Step 2: Setting the VCR to operate with the A/V connecting cable To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared rays to the remote sensor on the VCR. When you connect using an A/V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, steps
(1) to (4), to send the control signal correctly.
(1) Set the IR SETUP code 1 Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder. 2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE. When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/VTR. 3 Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
, then press the dial (p. 209). 4 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial. 5 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial. 6 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial. 7 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial. 8 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP and turn the dial to select IR SETUP code number of your VCR, then press the dial. Check the code in About IR SETUP codes. (p. 91) MENU OTHERS DATA CODE BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY VIDEO EDIT RETURN
[MENU] : END RETURN TAPE MEMORY 0:08:55:06 IR i. LINK 6 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 8 0:08:55:06 1 IN VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START EDIT SET TOTAL 0:00:00:00 SCENE 0
[MENU] : END 0:08:55:06 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 3 OTHERS DATA CODE BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY VIDEO EDIT RETURN
[MENU] : END READY OTHERS DATA CODE BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY VIDEO EDIT RETURN
[MENU] : END RETURN TAPE MEMORY 3 4 5 0:08:55:06 VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START EDIT SET IR TOTAL 0:00:00:00 SCENE 0
[MENU] : END 0:08:55:06 IR VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 90 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) About IR SETUP codes The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the correct code to match your VCR. The default setting is code number 3. Brand Sony Admiral (M. Wards) 89 Aiwa Akai Audio Dynamic Bell&Howell
(M. Wards) Broksonic Canon Citizen Craig Curtis Mathis Daewoo DBX Dimensia Emerson Fisher Funai General Electric Goldstar/LG GO VIDEO Hitachi HQ Instant Replay JC Penny JVC Kenwood LXI (Sears) Magnavox Marantz Marta Memorex Minolta IR SETUP code 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 47, 54, 80 49, 51 21, 35 36 21, 70, 82 77, 78 47 47, 73 8, 77, 80 26, 40, 77 21, 33, 35 8 26, 48, 59, 70, 80, 81, 82 36, 37, 44, 45 80 8, 32*, 77, 94*, 101 47 71 8, 42, 78 40 77, 78 8, 21, 33, 35, 36, 42, 77 12, 13, 14, 21, 33, 35 21, 33, 35, 47 36, 37, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 80 17, 77, 78, 83 21, 33, 35 47 37, 77 8, 42 E d i t i n g Brand Mitsubishi/MGA Multitech NEC Olympic Optimus Orion Panasonic Pentax Philco Philips Pioneer Quasar RCA/PROSCAN Realistic Sansui Singer Samsung Sanyo Scott Sharp Shintom Signature 2000 Sylvania Symphonic Tashiro Tatung Teac Technics Toshiba Wards Yamaha Zenith IR SETUP code 22, 23, 24, 28, 29 23, 32, 80 21, 33, 35 77, 78 22 60 16, 17, 77, 78 8, 42 26, 70, 77, 78 47, 77, 78, 83 78 6, 16, 17, 77, 78 7, 8, 16, 40, 41, 42, 77, 78, 78*, 83, 101 22, 36, 37, 77, 80, 88 21 73 24, 24*, 32, 32*, 41, 94, 94*
26, 36, 37, 47 22, 23, 24, 28, 32, 37, 40, 41 88, 89 73 80, 89 77, 78, 80, 83 80 47 21, 33, 35 21, 33, 35, 80 77, 78 7, 40, 49 37, 47, 88, 89, 95 21, 33, 35, 36 95
* TV/VCR component Note on IR SETUP codes Digital program editing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes. 91 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes)
(2) Setting the modes to cancel the recording pause on the VCR 1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial. 2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording pause on the VCR, then press the dial. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR. 0:08:55:06 2 1 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END PAUSE REC PB 0:08:55:06 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END PAUSE Buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:
Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X. Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z. Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.
(3) Setting your camcorder and the VCR to face each other Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote sensor of the VCR. Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the devices. Infrared rays emitter VCR Remote sensor A/V connecting cable (supplied) 92 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes)
(4) Confirming VCR operation 1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set to recording pause. 2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial. 3 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct. When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE. 2 3 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 0:08:55:06 ENGAGE REC PAUSE RETURN EXECUTE VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 0:08:55:06 COMPLETE When the VCR does not operate correctly After checking the code in About IR SETUP codes, set the IR SETUP or the PAUSEMODE again. Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR. E d i t i n g 93 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) Step 2: Setting the VCR to operate with the i.LINK cable
(DV connecting cable) When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional), follow the procedure below.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV input. When you connect a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/VTR.
(3) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
, then press the dial (p. 209).
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial. MENU OTHERS DATA CODE BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY VIDEO EDIT RETURN
[MENU] : END READY OTHERS DATA CODE BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY VIDEO EDIT RETURN
[MENU] : END RETURN TAPE MEMORY 3 4 5 OTHERS DATA CODE BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY VIDEO EDIT RETURN
[MENU] : END RETURN TAPE MEMORY 0:08:55:06 1 IN VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START EDIT SET TOTAL 0:00:00:00 SCENE 0
[MENU] : END 6 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 7 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 0:08:55:06 IR i. LINK 0:08:55:06 i. LINK 0:08:55:06 VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START EDIT SET IR TOTAL 0:00:00:00 SCENE 0
[MENU] : END 0:08:55:06 IR VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 94 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) You cannot dub the titles, display indicators. Note When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you may not be able to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR. Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder. Step 3: Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Have a pen and paper ready for notes. Before operation, eject a cassette from your camcorder.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, then set to recording pause. When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, you do not need to set to recording pause.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. IN and OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the number values for adjusting the synchronization. The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.
(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback. Take a note of the first number value of each IN and the closing number value of each OUT.
(5) Calculate the average of all the first number values of each IN, and the average of all the last number values of each OUT.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUT-IN, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of IN, then press the dial. The calculated start position for recording is set.
(8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUT-OUT, then press the dial.
(9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of OUT, then press the dial. The calculated stop position for recording is set.
(10)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial. E d i t i n g 95 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) 2,3 0:08:55:06 RETURN EXECUTE ENGAGE REC PAUSE VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[ME 0:08:55:06 EXECUTING No. 5 IN 60 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[ME 0:08:55:06 COMPLETE VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 6 8 0:08:55:06 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 0 0:08:55:06 VIDEO EDIT EDIT SET CONTROL ADJ TEST CUTIN CUTOUT IR SETUP PAUSEMODE IR TEST RETURN
[MENU] : END 0 Notes When you complete step 3, the image used to adjust the synchronization is recorded for about 50 seconds. If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 seconds lead before starting recording. When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) you may not be able to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR. Keep the i.LINK connection, and set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings. Video and audio are sent by digital signals. 96 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) Operation 1: Making a program
(1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for recording into the VCR.
(2) Press MENU and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
, then press the dial (p. 209).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial.
(4) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video operation buttons, then pause playback. You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.
(5) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, then press the dial. The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark changes to light blue.
(6) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video operation buttons, then pause playback.
(7) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. E d i t i n g The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program mark changes to light blue.
(8) Repeat steps 4 to 7, then set the program. When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue. You can set up to 20 programs in maximum. MENU 2 5 OTHERS DATA CODE BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY VIDEO EDIT RETURN
[MENU] : END READY 0:08:55:06 N X 1 OUT VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START EDIT SET TOTAL 0:00:00:00 SCENE 0
[MENU] : END OTHERS DATA CODE BEEP COMMANDER DISPLAY VIDEO EDIT RETURN
[MENU] : END RETURN TAPE MEMORY 7 VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START EDIT SET 0:09:07:06 N X 2 IN 3 VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START EDIT SET 0:08:55:06 1 IN TOTAL 0:00:00:00 SCENE 0
[MENU] : END 8 VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START EDIT SET 0:10:01:23 N X 4 IN TOTAL 0:00:12:00 SCENE 1
[MENU] : END TOTAL 0:00:47:12 SCENE 3
[MENU] : END 97 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) Erasing the program you have set Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last program.
(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled. To cancel erasing Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial in step 2. Erasing all programs
(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings, then select TAPE, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then select EXECUTE, then press the dial. All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled. To cancel erasing all programs Select RETURN with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial in step 2. To cancel a program you have set Press MENU. The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected. Note You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing. On a blank portion of the tape You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portion of the tape. If there is a blank portion between IN and OUT on the tape The total time code may not be displayed correctly. 98 Dubbing only desired scenes Digital program editing (on tapes) Operation 2: Performing the program (Dubbing a tape) Make sure that your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to recording pause. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), this procedure is not necessary. When you use a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/VTR.
(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings, then select TAPE, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then select EXECUTE, then press the dial. Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing. The program mark flashes. The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator appears during edit on the screen. The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing ends. When dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop. E d i t i n g To stop dubbing during editing Press x using the video operation buttons. To end the Digital program editing Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Press MENU to end the Digital program editing. You cannot record on the VCR when:
The tape has run out. The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock. The IR SETUP code is not correct. (when IR is selected) The button to cancel recording pause is not correct. (when IR is selected) NOT READY appears on the LCD screen when:
The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made. i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected. The power of the connected VCR is not turned on. (when you set i.LINK) 99 Recording video or TV programs Using the A/V connecting cable You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/
audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder. Before operation Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If you are recording a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder, then immediately press X on your camcorder.
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select a TV program if you are recording from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR appears on the screen.
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording from. 3 REC PAUSE S VIDEO Yellow White OUT S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO AUDIO/
VIDEO VCR
: Signal flow Red A/V connecting cable (supplied) When you have finished dubbing a tape Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. Using the Remote Commander In step 3, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 5, press X at the scene where you want to start recording from. 100
1 | manual3 | Users Manual | 1.68 MiB | / July 03 2002 |
Recording video or TV programs If your TV or VCR is a monaural type Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video output jack and the white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white plug is connected, the left channel audio is recorded, and when the red plug is connected, the right channel audio is recorded. If your TV or VCR has an S video jack Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the TV or VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures. Note on the Remote Commander Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper. E d i t i n g 101 Recording video or TV programs Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) to DV IN/OUT jack on your camcorder and to DV OUT on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder, and insert the recorded tape into the VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder, then immediately press X on your camcorder.
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on the screen.
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording from. 3 REC DV DV OUT
: Signal flow PAUSE DV IN/OUT i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) When you have finished dubbing a tape Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR. Using the Remote Commander In step 3, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 5, press X at the scene where you want to start recording from. 102 Recording video or TV programs You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable). During digital editing The color of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed picture. If you record playback pause picture with the DV IN/OUT jack The recorded picture becomes rough. When you play back the picture using your camcorder, the picture may jitter. Before recording Make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the screen or in the viewfinder. The DV IN indicator may appear on both equipment. Note on the Remote Commander Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper. E d i t i n g 103 Inserting a scene from a VCR Insert Editing You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Connections are the same as on page 100 or 102. Insert a cassette containing the desired scene to insert into the VCR.
[a]
[b]
[c]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]: A tape that contains the scene to be superimposed
[B]: A tape before editing
[C]: A tape after editing
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(2) On the connected VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a], then press X to set the VCR to the playback pause.
(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c]. Then press X to set your camcorder to the playback pause.
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in memory. The tape counter shows 0:00:00.
(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b] by pressing m, then press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously.
(6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder to start inserting the new scene. Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your camcorder automatically returns to the recording pause. 104 Inserting a scene from a VCR Insert Editing 5 REC 4 ZERO SET MEMORY 0:00:00 ZERO SET MEMORY To change the insert end point Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step 5 to erase the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and begin from step 3. E d i t i n g Using the Remote Commander In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 6, press X at the scene where you want to start recording from. Note Pictures and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points will be erased when you insert the new scene. If you insert scenes on the tape recorded on another camcorder (including other DCR-TRV40/TRV50) The pictures and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a tape recorded on your camcorder. When the inserted picture is played back Pictures and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted portion. This is not a malfunction. Pictures and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP mode. To insert a scene without setting the insert end point Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to stop inserting. If you press FN The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator is not displayed. Note on the Remote Commander Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper. 105 Audio dubbing You can record audio to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting audio equipment or a microphone. If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound to your recorded tape already recorded in the 12-bit sound mode by specifying the start and end points. The original sound will not be erased. Use the Remote Commander for this operation. Select one of the following connections to add audio. Connecting the microphone with the MIC jack MIC
(PLUG IN POWER)
: Signal flow Microphone (optional) You can check recorded picture and sound by connecting your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable. Recorded sound is not output from the speaker. Check the sound by using a TV or headphones. Connecting the microphone to the intelligent accessory shoe Intelligent accessory shoe Microphone (optional) 106 Audio dubbing Connecting the A/V connecting cable to the AUDIO/VIDEO jack Audio equipment AUDIO L LINE OUT R L AUDIO R White Red Do not connect the video (yellow) plug. AUDIO/
VIDEO E d i t i n g
: Signal flow A/V connecting cable (supplied) Dubbing with the built-in microphone No connection is necessary. Note When dubbing with the AUDIO/VIDEO jack or the built-in microphone, pictures are not output through the S VIDEO jack or the AUDIO/VIDEO jack. Check the recorded picture on the screen. You can check the recorded sound by using headphones. If you make all the connections The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order:
MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack Intelligent accessory shoe AUDIO/VIDEO jack Built-in microphone 107 Audio dubbing Adding audio on a recorded tape Choose a connection described on the previous pages, and connect audio equipment or microphone to your camcorder. Then follow the procedure below.
(1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(3) Locate the recording start point by pressing N. Then press X at the point where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback pause.
(4) Press AUDIO DUB on the Remote Commander. The green X indicator appears on screen.
(5) Press X and start playing back the audio you want to record at the same time. The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. While audio is being recorded, the red appears on the screen.
(6) Press x at the point where you want to stop recording. AUDIO DUB To add audio more precisely Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to stop recording later in the playback. Carry out from steps 3 to 5. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO SET MEMORY was pressed. 108 Audio dubbing Monitoring the new recorded sound
(1) Play back the tape on which you added audio.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select AUDIO MIX in in the menu settings, then press the dial. VCR SET HiFi SOUND AUDIO MIX A/VcDV OUT RETURN ST1 ST2
[MENU] : END
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the balance between the original sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2), then press the dial. E d i t i n g Five minutes after you disconnect the power supply or remove the battery pack, the AUDIO MIX setting returns to original sound (ST1) only. The default setting is original sound only. Notes New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz). New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode. You cannot add audio with the DV IN/OUT jack. You cannot add audio on the blank portion of the tape. If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) is connected to your camcorder You cannot add audio to a recorded tape. We recommend that you add audio on a tape recorded with your camcorder If you add audio on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including other DCR-TRV40/TRV50), the sound quality may become worse. If you set the write-protect tab of the cassette to lock You cannot record on a tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection. 109 Superimposing a title If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title. When you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point where you superimposed it. VACATION
(1) In the recording , recording standby, playback or playback pause, press with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 205). MENU, then select TITLE in
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial.
, then press the dial. The title flashes.
(4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary. 1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select COLOR, SIZE or POSITION, then press the dial. The selected item appears. 2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.
(5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting. In the recording, playback or playback pause:
The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the title is set. In the standby:
The TITLE indicator appears. When you press START/STOP to start recording, TITLE SAVE appears on the screen for five seconds, and the title is set. MENU 2 3 4 PRESET TITLE HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END
[MENU] : END PRESET TITLE HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END RETURN
[MENU] : END PRESET TITLE HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY HOLIDAYS CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY WEDDING VACATION THE END RETURN
[MENU] : END TITLE VACATION
[EXEC] : SAVE [MENU] : END SIZE SMALL TITLE SIZE LARGE VACATION VACATION
[EXEC] : SAVE [MENU] : END 110 Superimposing a title If you set the write-protect tab of the cassette to lock You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection. To use a custom title If you want to use a custom title, select in step 2. If the tape has a blank portion You cannot superimpose a title on the portion. If the tape has a blank portion between recorded portions Titles may not be displayed correctly. Titles superimposed with your camcorder Titles are displayed by only the The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when DV format video equipment with an index titler. searching a recording with other video equipment. If the tape has too many index signals You may not be able to superimpose a title because the cassette memory becomes full. In this case, delete data you do not need. To not display titles Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 205). Title setting The title color changes as follows:
The title size changes as follows:
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE SMALL y LARGE You cannot input 13 characters or more in LARGE size. If you input more than 12 characters, the title size returns to SMALL even if you select LARGE. If you select SMALL, you have nine choices for the title position. If you select LARGE, you have eight choices for the title position. One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, with each title comprising five characters However, if the cassette memory is full with date, photo and cassette label data, one cassette can have only up to about 11 titles each comprising five characters. Cassette memory capacity is as follows:
six date data 12 photo data one cassette label If the The cassette memory is full. Erase unwanted titles. FULL mark appears E d i t i n g 111 Superimposing a title Erasing a title
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLEERASE in
, then press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press the dial. ERASE OK ? indicator appears.
(4) Make sure that the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes to EXECUTE.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The ERASING flashes on the screen. When the title is erased, the COMPLETE is displayed. CM SET TITLE TITLEERASE TITLE DSPL CM SEARCH TAPE TITLE ERASE ALL RETURN
[MENU] : END 2 3 TITLE ERASE 1 HELLO!
2 CONGRATULATIONS!
3 HAPPY NEW YEAR!
4 PRESENT 5 GOOD MORNING 6 WEDDING
[MENU] : END 4 TITLE ERASE 4 PRESENT ERASE OK?
RETURN OK TITLE ERASE 4 PRESENT ERASE OK?
RETURN EXECUTE
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END MENU To cancel erasing a title Select RETURN in step 4 or 5. 112 Making your own titles You can make up to two titles and store them in the memory of your camcorder. Each title can have up to 20 characters.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLE in
, then press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET,
, then press the dial. then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial.
(7) Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have selected all characters and completed the title.
(8) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
[SET], then press the dial. E d i t i n g 3 4 5 7 TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET RETURN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END TITLE SET CUSTOM1 SET CUSTOM2 SET RETURN TITLE SET
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END 1 TITLE SET 2 TITLE SET
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END 3 TITLE SET 4 TITLE SET S MENU
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END 113 Making your own titles To change a title you have stored In step 4, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want to change, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter the new title as desired. If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in the standby while a cassette is in your camcorder The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then to CAMERA again, then proceed from step 1. We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR or removing the cassette so that your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters. To delete the title Select [C]. The last character is erased. To enter a space Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select the blank part. 114 Labeling a cassette If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. Labels can consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert the labeled cassette and when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or VCR, the label is displayed for about five seconds.
(1) Insert the cassette you want to label.
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
(3) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE in
, then press the dial (p. 205). Tape title display appears.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial.
(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you finish the label.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial. The label is stored in memory. E d i t i n g 3 MENU READY CM SET TITLE TITLEERASE TITLE DSPL CM SEARCH TAPE TITLE ERASE ALL RETURN CM SET TITLE
[MENU] : END TITLEERASE TITLE DSPL CM SEARCH TAPE TITLE ERASE ALL RETURN
[MENU] : END TAPE TITLE 4~6 TAPE TITLE TAPE TITLE
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END TAPE TITLE TAPE TITLE M
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END 115 Labeling a cassette To erase the label you have made In step 4 turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial. The last character is erased. To change the label you have made Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way to make a new label. If you set the write-protect tab of the cassette to lock You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection. If the tape has too many index signal You may not be able to label a cassette because the cassette memory becomes full. In this case, delete data you do not need. If you have superimposed titles in the cassette When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear. When the ----- indicator has fewer than 10 spaces The cassette memory is full. The ----- indicates the number of characters you can select for the label. To enter a space Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select the blank part. Erasing all the data in cassette memory You can erase all the data in cassette memory at once.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL in
, then press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes to EXECUTE. CM SET TITLE TITLEERASE TITLE DSPL CM SEARCH TAPE TITLE ERASE ALL RETURN
[MENU] : END RETURN OK CM SET TITLE TITLEERASE TITLE DSPL CM SEARCH TAPE TITLE ERASE ALL RETURN
[MENU] : END RETURN EXECUTE
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. ERASING flashes on the screen. When all the data is erased, COMPLETE is displayed. To cancel deleting Select RETURN with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial in step 3 or 4. 116 Memory Stick Operations Using a Memory Stick Introduction You can record and play back images on a Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder. You can easily play back, record or delete images. You can exchange image data with other equipment such as your computer etc., using the USB cable for Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder. On file format Still image (JPEG) Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg). Moving picture (MPEG) Your camcorder compresses picture data in MPEG format (extension .mpg). Typical image data file name Still image This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder. 100-0001:
Dsc00001.jpg: This file name appears on the display of your computer. Moving picture MOV00001:
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder. Mov00001.mpg: This file name appears on the display of your computer. Using a Memory Stick Terminal Write-protect tab Labeling position You cannot record or erase images when the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. model. The position and shape of the write-protect tab may be different depending on the We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of your computer. Image data may be damaged in the following cases:
If you eject the Memory Stick or turn the power off during reading or writing. If you use Memory Sticks near static electricity or magnetic fields. Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts of the terminal. Stick the label at the labeling position. Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to Memory Sticks. Do not disassemble or modify Memory Sticks. Do not let Memory Sticks get wet. Do not use or keep Memory Sticks in locations that are:
Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun. Under direct sunlight Very humid or subject to corrosive gases When you carry or store a Memory Stick, put it in its case. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 117 Using a Memory Stick Introduction Memory Sticks formatted on computer Memory Sticks formatted on Windows OS or Macintosh computers are not guaranteed compatible with your camcorder. Notes on image data compatibility Image data files recorded on Memory Sticks by your camcorder conform with the Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEITA
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). You cannot play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-
TRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/D770) that does not conform with this universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.) If you cannot use the Memory Stick that is used with other equipment, format it with this camcorder (p. 204). However, formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick. Memory Stick and All other product names mentioned here may be the trademarks or registered are trademarks of Sony Corporation. trademarks of their respective companies. TM and are not mentioned in each case in this manual. 118 Using a Memory Stick Introduction Inserting a Memory Stick Insert a Memory Stick in the Memory Stick slot as far as it can go with the B mark facing as illustrated. Access lamp Memory Stick slot B mark Ejecting a Memory Stick Press the Memory Stick once lightly. While the access lamp is lit or flashing Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data from the Memory Stick or recording the data on the Memory Stick. Do not turn the power off, eject a Memory Stick. Otherwise, image data may become damaged. MEMORY STICK ERROR is displayed If Reinsert Memory Stick a few times. The Memory Stick may be damaged if the indicator is still displayed. If this occurs, use another Memory Stick. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 119 Using a Memory Stick Introduction Using a touch panel Most operation buttons for use of Memory Sticks are displayed on the LCD screen. Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV50 only) to operate each function.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen. You can switch the memory playback/memory camera by pressing PLAY/CAM.
(3) Press FN. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(4) Press PAGE2 to go to PAGE2. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(5) Press PAGE3 to go to PAGE3. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(6) Press a desired operation item. Refer to relevant pages for each function. 3~6 FN In the memory camera 1 LOCK POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 1360 SFN PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 1/12 EXIT SELF TIMER SPOT FOCUS PLAY INDEX SPOT METER 1360 SFN PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 1/12 EXIT LCD BRT PLAY INDEX MEM M I X 2 1360 SFN 1/12 PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT In the memory camera In the memory playback (still image) SLIDE SHOW PLAY INDEX 9PIC PRINT PLAY INDEX FN
+
CAM INDEX FN 120 Using a Memory Stick Introduction To return to FN Press EXIT. To execute settings Press OK. To cancel settings Press OFF to return to PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3. Notes When using the touch panel, press operation buttons with your thumb supporting the LCD screen from the back side of it or press those buttons lightly with your index finger. Do not press the LCD screen with sharp objects other than the supplied stylus. (DCR-
TRV50 only) Do not press the LCD screen too hard. Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands. If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You can control the display with DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder. When operation buttons do not work even if you press them, an adjustment is required (CALIBRATION) (p. 230). When the LCD screen gets dirty, clean it with the supplied cleaning cloth. When executing each item The green bar appears above the item. If the items are not available The color of the items changes to gray. Press FN to display the following buttons:
In the memory camera PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 SELFTIMER, SPOT FOCUS, PLAY, INDEX, SPOT METER LCD BRT, PLAY, INDEX, MEM MIX SLIDE SHOW, PLAY, INDEX, 9PIC PRINT In the memory playback PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 PB ZOOM, CAM, INDEX, DELETE, + , LCD BRT, CAM, INDEX, DATA CODE, + , SLIDE SHOW, CAM, INDEX, 9PIC PRINT, + , M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 121 Using a Memory Stick Introduction Selecting the still image quality You can select the image quality in still image recording. The default setting is SUPER FINE.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then select STILL SET in with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial
(p. 203).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY , then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality , then press the dial. 1 LOCK POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 3 4 MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST QUALITY IMAGESIZE RETURN
[MENU] : END SUPER FINE FINE STANDARD REMAIN 12 MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST QUALITY IMAGESIZE RETURN
[MENU] : END STANDARD REMAIN 36 MENU 122 Using a Memory Stick Introduction Image quality settings Setting SUPER FINE (SFN) FINE (FINE) STANDARD (STD) Meaning This is the highest image quality in your camcorder. The number of still images you can record is less than in FINE mode. Super fine images are compressed to about 1/3. Use this mode when you want to record high quality images. Fine images are compressed to about 1/6. This is the standard image quality in your camcorder. Standard images are compressed to about 1/10. Note In some cases, changing the image quality may not affect the image quality, depending on the type of images you are shooting. Differences in image quality Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the selected image quality and image size. Details are shown in the table below. (You can select 1360 1020 or 640 480 image size in the menu settings.) 1360 1020 image size Image quality SUPER FINE FINE STANDARD 640 480 image size Image quality SUPER FINE FINE STANDARD Memory capacity About 900 KB About 450 KB About 300 KB Memory capacity About 190 KB About 100 KB About 60 KB Image quality indicator The image quality indicator is not displayed during playback. When you select image quality The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on the screen. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 123 Using a Memory Stick Introduction Selecting the image size You can select either of two image sizes Still images:
1360 1020 or 640 480. (When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or VCR, the image size is automatically set to 640 480.) The default setting is 1360 1020. Moving pictures: 320 240 or 160 112 The default setting is 320 240.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position. image) or MOVIE SET (moving picture) in
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET (still
, then press the dial (p. 203).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size, then press the dial. The indicator changes as follows:
Still images:
Moving pictures:
1360 320 640 160 1 LOCK POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 3 STILL SET MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST QUALITY IMAGESIZE RETURN 1360 1360 1020 640 480 REMAIN 12 MOVIE SET MEMORY SET MOVIE SET IMAGESIZE REMAIN RETURN 320 320 240 160 112 REMAIN 40sec
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END 4 STILL SET MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST QUALITY IMAGESIZE RETURN 640 480 REMAIN 60 MOVIE SET MEMORY SET MOVIE SET IMAGESIZE REMAIN RETURN 160 112 REMAIN 2min
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END MENU 124 Using a Memory Stick Introduction Image size settings Setting 1360 1020 Meaning Records 1360 1020 still images. 640 480 320 240 160 112 Records 640 480 still images. Records 320 240 moving pictures. Records 160 112 moving pictures. Indicator 1360 640 320 160 Approximate number of still images you can record on a Memory Stick The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality and image size you select and the complexity of the subject. Type of Memory Sticks Image quality Image size SUPER FINE FINE STANDARD 1360 1020 640 480 1360 1020 640 480 1360 1020 640 480 8MB
(supplied) 8 images 40 images 17 images 80 images 25 images 120 images 16MB
(optional) 17 images 80 images 34 images 160 images 50 images 240 images 32MB
(optional) 35 images 160 images 69 images 325 images 100 images 485 images 64MB 128MB
(optional)
(optional) 140 images 71 images 650 images 325 images 140 images 280 images 650 images 1310 images 205 images 415 images 980 images 1970 images Approximate time of moving pictures you can record on a Memory Stick The time of moving pictures you can record varies depending on which image size you select and the complexity of the subject. Type of Memory Sticks Image size 320 240 160 112 8MB
(supplied) 1 min. 20 sec. 5 min. 20 sec. 16MB
(optional) 2 min. 40 sec. 10 min. 40 sec. 32MB
(optional) 5 min. 20 sec. 21 min. 20 sec. 64MB
(optional) 10 min. 40 sec. 42 min. 40 sec. 128MB
(optional) 21 min. 20 sec. 85 min. 20 sec. The table above shows approximate number and times of still images and moving pictures you can record on a Memory Stick formatted by your camcorder. Note When still images recorded on your camcorder in 1360 1020 size are played back on other equipment that does not support 1360 1020 size, the full image may not appear. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 125 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording You can record still images on Memory Sticks. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PHOTO lightly. The green z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the image and focus are adjusted, being targeted for the middle of the image and are fixed. Recording does not start yet.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image will be displayed after the shutter sounds. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the Memory Stick. 2 3 O T O P H
[a][b]
SFN 1360 1 / 12 PLAY INDEX FN SFN 1360 1 LOCK POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK O T O P H PLAY INDEX FN
[a]: Number of recorded images
[b]: Approximate number of images that can be recorded on the Memory Stick You can record still images on Memory Sticks in the tape recording or tape recording standby For the details, see page 47. 126 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) The following functions do not work:
Wide mode Digital zoom SteadyShot Super NightShot Color Slow Shutter Fader Picture effect Digital effect Title Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.) While you are recording a still image You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO. When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button. When you press PHOTO lightly in step 2 The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction. Recording data The recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed while recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the Memory Stick. To display the recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote Commander for this opration (p. 42). When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 127 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording Recording images continuously You can record still images continuously. Before recording, select one of the four modes described below in the menu settings. NORMAL [a]
Your camcorder shoots up to three still images in 1360 1020 size or nine still images in 640 480 size at about 0.5 sec intervals. (
) HIGH SPEED [a]
Your camcorder shoots up to 16 still images in 640 480 size at about 0.07 sec intervals.
(
) EXP BRKTG (Exposure Bracketing) Your camcorder automatically shoots three images at about 0.5 sec intervals at different exposures. (
) MULTI SCRN (Multi Screen) [b]
Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.4 sec intervals and displays the images on a single page divided into nine boxes. Still images are recorded in 640 480 size. (
)
[a]
[b]
128 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET in
, then press the dial (p. 203).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select BURST, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the dial.
(5) Press MENU to make the menu setting disappear.
(6) Press PHOTO deeper. PHOTO MENU 3 4 MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST QUALITY IMAGESIZE RETURN OFF MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST QUALITY IMAGESIZE RETURN OFF NORMAL HIGH SPEED EXP BRKTG MULTI SCRN
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST QUALITY IMAGESIZE RETURN OFF NORMAL HIGH SPEED EXP BRKTG MULTI SCRN MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST QUALITY IMAGESIZE RETURN HIGH SPEED
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s If the capacity of the Memory Stick becomes full Stick. FULL appears on the screen, and you cannot record a still image on this Memory The number of still images in continuous shooting The number of still images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the image size and the capacity of the Memory Stick. During recording still images continuously The flash does not work. When shooting with the self-timer or the Remote Commander Your camcorder automatically records up to the maximum recordable number of still images. 129 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording When selecting NORMAL or HIGH SPEED Recording continues up to the maximum number of still images during pressing PHOTO deeper. Release PHOTO to stop recording. When selecting HIGH SPEED Flickering or changes in color may occur. Also, your camcorder prevents focusing on near objects. If there is space remaining on the Memory Stick for less than three photos You cannot carry out the exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG). when you press PHOTO. FULL is displayed The effect of exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG) The effect may not appear clearly on the LCD screen. Checking images on a TV monitor or computer display for the expected effect is recommended. Recording images with the flash The flash automatically pops up to strobe. The default setting is auto (no indicator). To change the flash mode, press appears on the screen.
(flash) repeatedly until the flash mode indicator
(flash) Each press of
(flash) changes the indicator as follows:
t t Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce the red-eye t No indicator Forced flash:
No flash:
phenomenon. The flash fires regardless of the surrounding brightness. The flash does not fire. The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 200). Try recording various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL. 130 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording Notes The recommended shooting distance using the built-in flash is 0.3 m to 2.5 m (31/32 feet to 8 1/3 feet). Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may block the light from the flash or cause lens shadow to appear. You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.
(auto red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired effect depending on individual differences, the distance to the subject, the subject not looking at the pre-
recording flash or other conditions. The flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location. If it is not easy to focus on a subject automatically, for example, when recording in the dark, use HOLOGRAM AF (p. 132) or the focal distance information (p. 70) for focusing manually. If you leave your camcorder for five or more minutes after disconnecting the power supply Your camcorder returns to the default setting (auto).
(auto red-eye reduction) The flash does not fire even if you select auto and during the following operations:
NightShot Exposure Flexible Spot meter Spotlight of PROGRAM AE Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE Landscape of PROGRAM AE When you use an external flash (optional) which does not have the auto red-eye reduction You cannot select the auto red-eye reduction. During recording images continuously The flash does not work. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 131 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording Shooting with an auxiliary light HOLOGRAM AF The HOLOGRAM AF is an auxiliary light source used for focusing on subjects in dark places. Set HOLOGRAM F in When auxiliary light will automatically emit until the subject is focused. appears on the screen in a dark place, press PHOTO lightly. Then the to AUTO in the menu settings. (The default setting is AUTO.) HOLOGRAM AF emitter About HOLOGRAM AF HOLOGRAM AF (Auto-Focus), an application of laser holograms, is a new AF optical system that enables still image shooting in dark places. Having gentler radiation than conventional high-brightness LEDs or lamps, the system satisfies Laser Class 1 (*) specification and thus maintains higher safety for human eyes. No safety problems will be caused by directly looking into the HOLOGRAM AF emitter at a close range. However, it is not recommended to do so, because you may experience such effects like several minutes of image residual and dazzling, that you encounter after looking into a flashlight.
* HOLOGRAM AF satisfies Class 1(time base 30 000 seconds), specified in all of JIS
(Japan), IEC(EU), and FDA(US) industry standards. Complying with these standards identifies the laser product to be safe, under a condition that a human looks at the laser light either directly or even through a lens for 30 000 seconds. 132 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording Notes A conversion lens (optional) may obstruct the HOLOGRAM AF light and make focusing difficult. If enough light does not reach the subject even if the HOLOGRAM AF emitter is emitted (recommended shooting distance is 2.5 m (8 1/3 feet)), the subject will not be focused. Focusing may be hampered if the light emitted from the HOLOGRAM AF is blocked by an obstruction. Focus is achieved as long as HOLOGRAM AF light reaches to the subject even if its light is slightly out of the middle position of the subject. If HOLOGRAM AF light is dim, it sometimes becomes difficult to focus. If this happens, wipe the HOLOGRAM AF emitter with a soft, dry cloth. No flash The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit when:
Flash is set to NightShot is set to ON Focusing manually Using Spot Focus Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE Landscape of PROGRAM AE Continuous photo recording When you use the external flash (optional) HOLOGRAM AF emits. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 133 Recording still images on Memory Sticks Memory Photo recording Self-timer memory photo recording You can record images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(3) Press SELFTIMER. The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically. 4 O T O P H PHOTO 2 FN To cancel the self-timer Press SELFTIMER so that the cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.
(self-timer) indicator disappears on the screen. You Note The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:
Self-timer recording is finished. The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR. 134 Recording images from a tape as still images Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a still image on a Memory Stick. Your camcorder can also capture moving picture data through the input connector and record it as a still image on a Memory Stick. Before operation Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder. Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press N. Moving pictures recorded on the tape are played back.
(3) Press PHOTO lightly until picture you want to capture from the tape freezes and CAPTURE appears on the screen. Recording does not start yet. To change from the image selected to another image, release PHOTO once and press it lightly again.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on the Memory Stick. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. 2 REW PLAY FF 3
[a][b]
SFN 640 1 / 12 CAPTURE 4 SFN 640 O T O P H PB INDEX FN O T O P H PB INDEX FN
[a]: Number of recorded images
[b]: Approximate number of images that can be recorded on the Memory Stick M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 135 Recording images from a tape as still images Image size of still images Image size is automatically set to 640 480. When the access lamp is lit or flashing Do not shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a Memory Stick. Otherwise, image data may become damaged. appears on the screen If The inserted Memory Stick is incompatible with your camcorder because its format does not conform with your camcorder. Check the format of the Memory Stick. If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback Your camcorder stops momentarily. Sound recorded on a tape You cannot record audio from a tape. Titles already recorded on cassettes You cannot record titles on Memory Sticks. Titles do not appear while you are recording a still image with PHOTO. Recording date/time The recording data (date/time) when it is recorded on a Memory Stick is recorded. Various settings are not recorded. Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on a Memory Stick. When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button. 136 Recording images from a tape as still images Recording a still image from external equipment Before operation Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program. The image of the external equipment is displayed on the screen.
(3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 135. Using the A/V connecting cable S VIDEO M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s AUDIO/
VIDEO OUT Yellow S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO VCR
: Signal flow A/V connecting cable (supplied) Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video jack on the VCR or the TV. If your TV or VCR has an S video jack Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the TV or VCR. 137 Recording images from a tape as still images Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) DV DV OUT DV IN/OUT
: Signal flow i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) Note In the following instances, recording is interrupted or and recording is not possible. Record distortion-free images. When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has REC ERROR is displayed, When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception been repeatedly used for dubbing when a TV tuner unit is in use 138 Superimposing a still image in the Memory Stick on an image MEMORY MIX You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the Memory Stick on the moving picture you are recording. You can record the superimposed images on a tape or a Memory Stick. (However, you can record only superimposed still images on the Memory Stick.) M. CHROM (memory chroma key) You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a moving picture. M. LUMI (memory luminance key) You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title with a moving picture. Record a title on the Memory Stick before a trip or event for convenience. C. CHROM (camera chroma key) You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image such as an image that can be used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the moving picture will be swapped with a still image. M. OVERLAP* (memory overlap) You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image recorded on the Memory Stick as the overlap. Still image Moving picture Blue Still image Moving picture Still image Moving picture M. CHROM M C A M C H R O M M. LUMI M C A M L U M I C. CHROM C A M M C H R O M M. OVERLAP*
Still image Moving picture Blue O V E R L A P
* The superimposed image using Memory overlap can be recorded on tapes only. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 139 Superimposing a still image in the Memory Stick on an image MEMORY MIX Recording superimposed images on a tape Before operation Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder. Insert a Memory Stick recorded still images into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(3) Press MEM MIX. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.
(4) Press /+ on the right lower corner of the screen to select the still image which you want to superimpose.
: To see the previous image
+: To see the next image
(5) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.
(6) Press /+ on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press OK to return to PAGE1. M. CHROM:
M. LUMI:
C. CHROM:
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a still image and superimpose it on a moving image Brightness level used when extracting a still image and superimposing it on a moving image Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a moving picture and superimpose it on a still image M. OVERLAP: No adjustment necessary The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.
(7) Press EXIT to return to FN.
(8) Press START/STOP to start recording. 140 Superimposing a still image in the Memory Stick on an image MEMORY MIX 1 POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK MEM MIX OFF CAMCM CHROM MCCAM LUMI MCCAM CHROM OVER-
LAP OK Still image 1000001
+
OK 1000001
+
OK 1000001
+
MEM MIX OFF M. LUMI
+
MEM MIX OFF M. LUMI
+
+
+
3,4 MEM M I X 5 6 2 FN To change the still image to be superimposed Press /+ on the right lower corner before step 6. To cancel MEMORY MIX OFF to return to PAGE1. Press Notes You cannot use the MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on Memory Sticks. When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of the picture may not be clear. Image data modified on your computer or shot with other equipment You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder. When you select M. OVERLAP You cannot change the still image or the mode setting. During recording You cannot change the mode setting. To record the superimposed image as a still image Press PHOTO deeper in step 8 (You should set PHOTO REC in menu settings beforehand). to TAPE in the M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 141 Superimposing a still image in the Memory Stick on an image MEMORY MIX Recording superimposed images on a Memory Stick as a still image Before operation Insert a Memory Stick recorded still images into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN and select PAGE2.
(3) Press MEM MIX. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.
(4) Press /+ on the right lower corner of the screen to select the still image which you want to superimpose.
: To see the previous image
+: To see the next image
(5) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.
(6) Press /+ on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press OK to return to PAGE2. M. CHROM:
M. LUMI:
C. CHROM:
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a still image and superimpose it on a moving image Brightness level used when extracting a still image and superimposing it on a moving image Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a moving picture and superimpose it on a still image The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.
(7) Press EXIT to return to FN.
(8) Press PHOTO deeper to start recording. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a Memory Stick. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. 142 Superimposing a still image in the Memory Stick on an image MEMORY MIX POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK Still image 1 3,4 MEM M I X MEM MIX OFF CAMCM CHROM MCCAM LUMI MCCAM CHROM 5 6 MEM MIX OFF M. LUMI
+
MEM MIX OFF M. LUMI
+
+
+
OK 1000001
+
OK 1000001
+
OK 1000001
+
2 FN To change the still image to be superimposed Press /+ on the right lower corner before step 6. To cancel MEMORY MIX OFF to return to PAGE2. Press Notes You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on Memory Sticks. When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of the picture may not be clear. Image size of still pictures Image size is automatically set to 640 480. Image data modified with your computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder. During recording You cannot change the mode setting. When recording images on a Memory Stick using the MEMORY MIX The PROGRAM AE does not work. (The indicator flashes.) The Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder stores 20 images For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001~100-0018 For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 100-0019~100-0020 Sample images Sample images stored in the Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder are protected (p. 167). M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 143 Recording moving pictures on Memory Sticks MPEG movie recording You can record moving pictures with sound on Memory Sticks. The picture and sound and recorded up to the capacity of Memory Stick (MPEG MOVIE EX). Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder lights up. The picture and sound are recorded up to the remaining capacity of Memory Stick. For more information about recording time, see page 125. 2
[a]:
40min REC 320 0:00:03 15min BBB PLAY INDEX FN
[a]
[b]
Recording time that can be recorded on the Memory Stick.
[a] [b]: These indicators are displayed for five seconds after pressing START/STOP. This indicator is not recorded. To stop recording Press START/STOP. 144 Recording moving pictures on Memory Sticks MPEG movie recording Note Sound is recorded in monaural. When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) The following functions do not work:
Wide mode Digital zoom SteadyShot Super NightShot Color Slow Shutter Fader Picture effect Digital effect Title Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.) When using an external flash (optional) Turn the power of the external flash off when recording moving pictures on Memory Sticks. Otherwise, the charging sound for the flash may be recorded. Recording date/time The date/time are not displayed while recording. However, they are automatically recorded onto the Memory Stick. To display the recording date/time, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 42). Various settings cannot be recorded. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s During recording on Memory Stick Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. During ejecting the tape, sound is recorded on the Memory Stick. When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA. 145 Recording moving pictures on Memory Sticks MPEG movie recording Self-timer MPEG movie recording You can record moving pictures on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(3) Press SELFTIMER. The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(4) Press START/STOP. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically. 2 FN START/STOP 4 To stop the countdown Press START/STOP. To restart the self-timer, press START/STOP again. To cancel the self-timer Press SELFTIMER so that the cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.
(self-timer) indicator disappears on the screen. You Note The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:
Self-timer recording is finished. The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR. 146 Recording pictures from tape as a moving picture Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a moving picture on a Memory Stick. Your camcorder can also capture moving picture data through the input connector and record it as a moving picture on a Memory Stick. Before operation Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder. Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the tape is played back. And press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.
(3) Press START/STOP on your camcorder. The picture and sound are recorded up to the remaining capacity of the Memory Stick. For more information about recording time, see page 125. 40min 320 BBB N 0:15:42:43 REC 0:00:03 15min PB INDEX FN
[a]
[b]
M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 3
[a]:
The recording time that can be recorded on the Memory Stick.
[a] [b]: This indicator is displayed for five seconds after pressing START/
STOP. This indicator is not recorded. 2 PLAY PAUSE To stop recording Press START/STOP. 147 Recording pictures from tape as a moving picture Notes Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to 32 kHz sound when recording images from a tape to Memory Sticks. Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from tape. When the access lamp is lit or flashing Do not shake or knock the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a Memory Stick. Otherwise, image data may become damaged. Titles already recorded on cassettes You cannot record titles on Memory Sticks. Titles do not appear while you are recording moving picture with START/STOP. AUDIO ERROR is displayed If Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded. Connect the A/V connecting cable to input images from external equipment used to play back the image
(p. 149). Recording date/time The recording data (date/time) when it is recorded on Memory Stick is recorded. Various settings are not recorded. Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on a Memory Stick. 148 Recording pictures from tape as a moving picture Recording a moving picture from external equipment Before operation Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program. The image of the other equipment is displayed on the screen.
(3) Follow the procedure on page 147 from the step 3 onwards at the point where you want to start recording from. Using the A/V connecting cable S VIDEO AUDIO/
VIDEO M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s OUT Yellow White S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO A/V connecting cable (supplied) Red VCR
: Signal flow If your TV or VCR has an S video jack Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the TV or VCR. 149 Recording pictures from tape as a moving picture Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) DV DV OUT DV IN/OUT
: Signal flow i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) Note In the following instances, pictures. When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has REC ERROR is displayed and you cannot record When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception been repeatedly used for dubbing when a TV tuner unit is in use When the input signal is cut off During recording on Memory Stick Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. 150
1 | manual4 | Users Manual | 1.57 MiB | / July 03 2002 |
Recording edited pictures from a tape as a moving picture Digital program editing (on Memory Sticks) You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto Memory Sticks. Making the program
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Insert the tape for playback, and a Memory Stick for recording into your camcorder.
(3) Press MENU and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
, then press the dial (p. 209).
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE and select the desired image size, then press the dial.
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video operation buttons, then pause playback. You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.
(7) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, the press the dial. The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark changes to light blue.
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video operation buttons, then pause playback.
(9) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program mark changes to light blue.
(10)Repeat steps 6 to 9, then set the program. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s When one program is set, the program mark changes to light blue. You can set 20 programs in maximum. 6,8 REW PLAY FF STOP PAUSE 7 VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START IMAGESIZE N X 0:08:55:06 1 OUT MENU 9 VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START IMAGESIZE 0:08:58:06 N X 2 IN 10 VIDEO EDIT MARK UNDO ERASE ALL START IMAGESIZE 0:10:01:23 N X 4 IN TOTAL 0:00:00 SCENE 0 2min 320 TOTAL 0:00:12 SCENE 1 2min 320
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END TOTAL 0:00:31 SCENE 3 2min 320
[MENU] : END 151 Recording edited pictures from a tape as a moving picture Digital program editing (on Memory Sticks) Erasing the program you have set Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last program.
(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled. To cancel erasing Select RETURN with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial in step 2. Erasing all programs
(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings, then select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then select EXECUTE, then press the dial. All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled. To cancel erasing all programs Select RETURN with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial in step 2. To cancel a program you have set Press MENU. The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected. Notes You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory. You cannot operate recording during the Digital program editing on Memory Sticks. On a blank portion of the tape You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portions of the tape. If there is a blank portion between IN and OUT on the tape The total time code may not be displayed correctly. During making a program If you eject the cassette, NOT READY appears on the screen. The program will be erased. 152 Recording edited pictures from a tape as a moving picture Digital program editing (on Memory Sticks) Performing the program (Dubbing on a Memory Stick)
(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings, then select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then select EXECUTE, then press the dial. Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing. The program mark flashes. The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator appears during writing of data on your camcorder, and REC appears during dubbing on the screen. The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing is complete. When the dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops. To stop dubbing during editing Press x using the video operation buttons. The program you made is recorded on a Memory Stick up to the place where you pressed x. To end the Digital program editing Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Press MENU to end the Digital program editing. NOT READY appears on the LCD screen when:
The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made. The Memory Stick is not inserted. The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. When Memory Stick does not have enough space to record LOW MEMORY appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures up to the time indicated. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 153 Copying still images from a tape PHOTO SAVE Using the search function, you can automatically capture only still images from tapes and record them on a Memory Stick in sequence. Before operation Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape. Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE in
, then press the dial (p. 204). PHOTO BUTTON appears on the screen.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still images from the tape are recorded on the Memory Stick. The number of still images copied is displayed. END is displayed when copying ends. 3 2 PHOTO SAVE 0:00:00:00 PHOTO SAVE 0:30:00:00 4/15 640 STD SAV I NG 0 8/15 640 STD END 4 O T O P H
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END MEMORY SET STILL SET MOVIE SET PHOTO SAVE FILE NO. RETURN READY PHOTO SAVE 0:00:00:00 4/15 640 STD PHOTO BUTTON
[MENU] : END
[PHOTO] : START [MENU] : END MENU To stop copying Press MENU or x. When the Memory Stick becomes full MEMORY FULL appears on the screen, and copying stops. Insert another Memory Stick and repeat the procedure from step 2. 154 Copying still images from a tape PHOTO SAVE Image size of still images Image size is automatically set to 640 480. When the access lamp is lit or flashing Do not shake or knock your camcorder. As well do not turn the power off, eject a Memory Stick. Otherwise, image data may become damaged. If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK NOT READY appears when you select the item in the menu settings. When you change Memory Sticks during copying Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous Memory Stick. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 155 Viewing still images Memory Photo playback You can play back still images recorded on a Memory Stick. You can also play back six images including moving pictures in order at a time by selecting the index screen. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PLAY or
(3) Press /+ on your camcorder to select the desired still image. PB. The last recorded image is displayed.
: To see the previous image
+: To see the next image 2 PLAY PB To stop Memory Photo playback Press CAM, VCR on your camcorder or MEMORY PLAY button on the Remote Commander. 156 Viewing still images Memory Photo playback You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:
When playing back image data modified on your computer. When playing back image data shot with other equipment. Notes on the file name The directory number may not be displayed and only the file name may be displayed if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard.
- DIRECTORY ERROR may appear on screen if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard. While this message appears, you can play back images but cannot record them on the Memory Stick. The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable. To play back recorded images on a TV screen Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, image quality may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good as ever. Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be output from the TV speakers. Still image You can select still images also with /+ on PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3. When no image is recorded on the Memory Stick When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander, NO FILE appears. Screen indicators during still image playback Image size Image number/Total number of recorded images 1000006 1360 6/100 MEMORY PLAY Print mark Protect JUL 4 2002 12:05:56 AM
+
CAM INDEX FN Recording date/time/various settings Data Directory Number, File Number When the POWER switch is set to VCR, VCR is displayed instead of CAM Recording data You can view recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) when you press DATA CODE on PAGE2. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation. To make screen indicators disappear Press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 157 Viewing still images Memory Photo playback Playing back six recorded images at a time (index screen) You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when searching for a particular image. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen. A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index screen mode. T : To display the previous six images t : To display the following six images B mark
-MARK 1 4 MARK DEL 2 EXIT 3 5 6 T 1 / 40 t To return to FN Press EXIT. To return to the normal playback screen (single screen) Press the image you want to display. Note When displaying the index screen, the number appears above each image. This indicates the order in which images are recorded on the Memory Stick. These numbers are different from the data file names. Image data modified on your computer or shot with other equipment These files are sometimes not displayed on the index screen. 158 Viewing moving pictures MPEG movie playback You can play back moving pictures recorded on a Memory Stick. You can also play back six images including still images in order at a time by selecting the index screen. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PLAY or
(3) Press /+ to select the desired moving pictures. PB.
: To see the previous picture
+ : To see the next picture
(4) Press MPEG N X to start playback.
(5) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.
: To turn down
+ : To turn up When you close the LCD panel, sound is muted. VOLUME 2 PLAY PB To stop MPEG movie playback Press MPEG N X. You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:
When playing back image data modified on your computer. When playing back image data shot with other equipment. To play back recorded picutres on a TV screen Before operation connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be supplied with your camcorder. output from the TV speakers. Moving picture You can select moving pictures also with /+ on PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3. When no image is recorded on the Memory Stick When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander, NO FILE appears. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 159 Viewing moving pictures MPEG movie playback Playing back a moving picture from the desired part The moving picture recorded on Memory Stick is divided into 23 parts. You can select every each one point and play back pictures. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PLAY or
(3) Press +/ to select the desired moving pictures. PB.
: To see the previous picture
+ : To see the next picture
(4) Press </, to select the point where you want to play back.
< :To see previous part
, :To see next part 320 1/2 0 : 00 : 00 MOV00001 MPEG N X
+
CAM INDEX FN
(5) Press MPEG N X to start playback. To stop MPEG movie playback Press MPEG N X. When recording time is too short The moving picture may not be divided into 23 parts. 160 Viewing moving pictures MPEG movie playback Screen indicators during moving picture playback Image size Picture number/Total number of recorded pictures MOV00001 MPEG N X JUL 4 2002 12 : 05 : 56
+
320 1/20 0 : 01 : 00 Protect CAM INDEX FN When the POWER switch is set to VCR, VCR is displayed instead of CAM. Recording date/time. (Various settings are displayed as .) Data directory number/File number Recording date/time You can view recording date/time when you press DATA CODE on PAGE2. Various settings are not recorded. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.
(p. 42) To make screen indicator disappear Press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 161 Copying images recorded on Memory Sticks to tape You can copy images recorded on Memory Sticks and record them to tape. Before operation Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder. Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Using the video control buttons, search a point where you want to record the desired images. Set the tape to playback pause.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder. The tape is set to the recording pause.
(4) Press
(5) Press +/ to select the desired image. PB. The last recorded image is displayed.
: To see the previous image
+ : To see the next image
(6) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop. z appears on the screen during recording.
(7) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 5 and 6. 4 3 PB REC To stop copying in the middle Press x. 2 PAUSE 162 Copying images recorded on Memory Sticks to tape During copying You cannot operate the following functions:
MEMORY PLAY MEMORY INDEX MEMORY DELETE MEMORY +/
Note on the index screen You cannot record the index screen. If you press EDITSEARCH during pause Memory playback stops. Image data modified on your computers or shot with other equipment You may not be able to copy modified images with your camcorder. When copying movies After step 6, press the MPEG N X and play back the image. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 163 Enlarging still images recorded on Memory Sticks Memory PB ZOOM You can enlarge still images recorded on a Memory Stick. You can select and view a desired part from the enlarged still image. Also, you can copy the desired part of the enlarged still image to tapes or Memory Sticks. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Press FN to display PAGE1 during the memory playback (p. 120). When you set the POWER switch to VCR, press FN and select PAGE2 during the memory playback (p. 24).
(2) Press PB ZOOM. PB ZOOM screen appears.
(3) Press the area that you want to enlarge in the frame on the PB ZOOM screen. The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback image is enlarged approximately at twice the size. If you press the other area, the area moves to the center of the screen.
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever. You can enlarge the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its size. W : Decreases the zoom ratio T : Increases the zoom ratio 4 PB ZOOM 5.0 1360 3/14 MEMORY PLAY W T 1000003 END 1 FN 2 PB ZOOM PB ZOOM 1360 3/14 MEMORY PLAY 1000003 END To cancel PB ZOOM Press END. 164 Enlarging still images recorded on Memory Sticks Memory PB ZOOM The PB ZOOM is canceled when the following operations:
MENU MEMORY PLAY MEMORY INDEX MEMORY +/
Moving pictures recorded on Memory Sticks The PB ZOOM does not work. To record the still image processed by Memory PB ZOOM on Memory Sticks Press the PHOTO button to record the still image processed by PB ZOOM. (Images are recorded at 640 480 size.) In the PB ZOOM mode If you press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen. Edge of the enlarged image The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen. To record an image proceeded on PB ZOOM on tapes Record an image following the procedure on page 162. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 165 Playing back images in a continuous loop SLIDE SHOW You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially when checking recorded images or during a presentation. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.
(3) Press SLIDE SHOW.
(4) Press START. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on a Memory Stick in sequence. 2 FN 4 SLIDE SHOW 1000001 1360 1 / 6 PAUSE
+
END 1 LOCK POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK To stop the slide show Press END. To pause during a slide show Press PAUSE. To return to FN Press END to return to PAGE3, then press EXIT. To start the slide show from a particular image Select the desired image using /+ buttons before step 4. To view recorded images on TV Before operation connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. If you change the Memory Stick during operation The slide show does not operate. If you change the Memory Stick, be sure to follow the steps again from the beginning. 166 Preventing accidental erasure Image protection You can protect selected images to prevent accidental erasure of important images. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press INDEX on your camcorder to display the index.
(3) Press - MARK. The screen to protect the image appears.
(4) Press the image you want to protect. The - appears on the protected image. 2 INDEX 3,4
-MARK
-MARK 1 4 MARK DEL 2 EXIT 3 5 6
-MARK
-
RET. 1 4 2 5 EXIT 3 6 T 1 / 40 t T 2 / 40 t To return to FN Press EXIT. To cancel image protection Press the image you want to cancel image protection in step 4 again. The -
disappears. Note Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick, including the protected image data. Before formatting a Memory Stick, check its contents. If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK You cannot protect images. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 167 Deleting images DELETE You can delete images stored in a Memory Stick. You can delete all images or only selected images. Deleting selected images Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the image you want to delete.
(3) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(4) Press DELETE. DELETE? appears on the LCD screen.
(5) Press OK. The selected image is deleted. 3 4 FN DELE TE DELETE 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 1360 3 / 40 DELETE?
OK CAN CEL To return to FN Press EXIT. To cancel deleting an image Press CANCEL in step 5. Notes To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection. Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Before deleting an image, carefully check the image. If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK You cannot delete images. 168 Deleting images DELETE Deleting selected images on the index screen Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.
(3) Press DEL. Then press the images you want to delete. The number of the selected image is highlighted.
(4) Press EXEC. DELETE? appears on the LCD screen.
(5) Press OK. The selected images are deleted. 2 3 INDEX DEL
-MARK 1 4 MARK DEL 2 EXIT 3 5 6 RET. 1 4 DEL
-
EXEC 2 EXIT 3 5 6 T 1 / 40 t T 3 / 40 t To return to FN Press EXIT. To cancel deleting an image Press CANCEL in step 5. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 169 Deleting images DELETE Deleting all images You can delete all unprotected images in a Memory Stick. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL in
, then press the dial (p. 204).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes to EXECUTE.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. DELETING flashes on the screen. When all unprotected images are deleted, COMPLETE is displayed. 2 3 4 MEMORY SET STILL SET MOVIE SET FILE NO. DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN READY MEMORY SET STILL SET MOVIE SET FILE NO. DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN RETURN OK
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END MEMORY SET STILL SET MOVIE SET FILE NO. DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN RETURN OK MEMORY SET STILL SET MOVIE SET FILE NO. DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN RETURN EXECUTE
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END MEMORY SET STILL SET MOVIE SET FILE NO. DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN DELETING MEMORY SET STILL SET MOVIE SET FILE NO. DELETE ALL FORMAT RETURN COMPLETE
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END MENU To cancel deleting all the images in the Memory Stick Select RETURN in step 3 or 4. While DELETING appears Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons. 170 Writing a print mark PRINT MARK You can specify a recorded still image to print out by writing a print mark. This function is useful for printing out still images later. Your camcorder conforms to the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for specifying still images to print out. Before operation Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.
(3) Press
(4) Press the image you want to write a print mark. The MARK. The screen to write a print mark appears. appears on the selected image. 2 INDEX 3,4
-MARK 1 4 MARK DEL 2 EXIT 3 5 6 RET. 1 4 MARK 2 5 EXIT 3 6 MARK T 1 / 40 t T 2 / 40 t To return to FN Press EXIT. To cancel writing print marks Press the image you want to cancel the print mark in step 4 again . The disappears. If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK You cannot write print marks on still images. Moving pictures You cannot write print marks on moving pictures. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 171 Using the optional printer You can use the optional printer on your camcorder to print images on print paper. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer. There are various ways of printing still images. The following describes the setup for print by selecting in the menu settings and the set up for print setup by selecting 9PIC PRINT on the touch panel on your camcorder. Before operation Insert a recorded Memory Stick into your camcorder. Attach the optional printer to your camcorder as illustrated. Printer FN MENU Setting with the menu You can print DATE/TIME on print paper.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DATE/TIME in
, then press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode. DATE DAY & TIME JUL 4 2002 4 12:00AM 172 Using the optional printer Setting with the touch panel You can make 9 stickers on a single sheet when you print images recorded on a Memory Stick in 9PIC PRINT.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.
(3) Press 9PIC PRINT.
(4) Press the desired mode. SAME PICS MULTI PICS or MARKED PICS*
* Nine still images with print marks are printed together. Moving pictures recorded on Memory Stick You cannot print moving pictures. When Memory Stick has no files NO STILL IMAGE FILE appears on the screen. When there are no files with a PRINT MARK NO PRINT MARK appears on the screen. Images processed by 9PIC PRINT You cannot insert a DATE/TIME indicator. Images recorded in the MULTI SCRN You cannot print images recorded in the multi screen mode on sticker type print paper. M e m o r y S t i c k O p e r a t i o n s 173 Viewing Images Using your Computer Viewing images on your computer Introduction There are the following ways of connecting the camcorder to a computer in order to view images saved on a Memory Stick or recorded on tape on your computer. To view images on a computer which has a Memory Stick slot, first eject the Memory Stick from the camcorder and then insert it into the computers Memory Stick slot. Camcorder Connection jack Connection cable USB jack DV jack USB jack USB cable
(supplied) i.LINK cable
(DV connecting cable ) (optional) USB cable
(supplied) Computer environment requirements USB connector, editing software DV connector, editing software USB connector, editing software Tape stills and movies Memory Stick stills and movies When connecting to a computer via the USB jack, complete installation of the USB driver before connecting the camcorder to the computer. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first, you will not be able to install the USB driver correctly. For details about your computers connectors and editing software, contact the computer manufacturer. Viewing images recorded on a tape When connecting to a computer using the USB jack For more information, see page 177.
(USB) jack Push into the end USB connector USB cable (supplied) 174 Viewing images on your computer Introduction When connecting to a computer using the DV jack Your computer must have a DV connector and editing software installed that can read video signals. is marked on this side DV IN/OUT DV connector
: Signal flow i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) Viewing images recorded on a Memory Stick When connecting to a computer using the USB jack There are two methods of USB connection, NORMAL and PTP. The default setting is NORMAL. Here we explain how to use the camcorder with a standard USB connection
(NORMAL). See page 177 when using Windows and page 193 when using Macintosh.
(USB) jack V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r USB connector USB cable (supplied) You can also use a Memory Stick Reader/Writer (optional). When connecting to a computer without a USB jack Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for Memory Stick or a PC card adaptor for Memory Stick. When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended operating environment. 175 Viewing images on your computer Introduction Notes on using your computer Memory Stick Memory Stick operations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a Memory Stick formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the Memory Stick in your camcorder was formatted from your computer when the USB cable was connected. Do not compress the data on the Memory Stick. Compressed files cannot be played back on your camcorder. Software Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a still image file. When you load an image modified using retouching software from your computer to your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open the file. Communications with your computer Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep. 176 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting the camcorder to the computer. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first, you will not be able to install the USB driver correctly. When connecting to a computer using the USB cable You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to the computers USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied, along with the application software required for viewing images. If you connect your camcorder and your computer using the USB cable, you can view pictures live from your camcorder and pictures recorded on a tape on your computer
(USB streaming function). Furthermore, if you download pictures from your camcorder to your computer, you can process or edit them in image processing software and append them to e-mail. You can view images recorded on a Memory Stick on your computer. Recommended computer usage environment when connecting via USB cable and viewing tape images on the computer OS:
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional Standard installation is required. However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS. You cannot hear sound if your computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still images. CPU:
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended) Application:
DirectX 8.0a or later Sound system:
16 bit stereo sound card and stereo speakers Memory:
64 MB or more Hard disk:
Available memory required for installation:
at least 200MB Available hard disc memory recommended:
at least 1GB (depending on the size of the image files edited) Display:
4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 600 dot Hi color (16 bit color, 65 000 colors), Direct Draw display driver capability (At 800 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this product will not operate correctly.) Others:
This product is compatible with DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX. The USB connector must be provided as standard. You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment. V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 177 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users Recommended computer usage environment when connecting via USB cable and viewing Memory Stick images on the computer OS:
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional Standard installation is required. However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS. CPU:
MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster The USB connector must be provided as standard. Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures). Notes Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub. Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments used simultaneously. mentioned above. Windows and Windows Media are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Pentium is trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, TM and are not mentioned in each case in this manual. 178 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users Installing the USB driver Start the following operation without connecting the USB cable to your computer. Connect the USB cable according to Making the computer recognize the camcorder. If you are using Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Home Edition/
Professional, log in with permission of Administrators.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The application software starts up and the title screen appears.
(3) Move the cursor to USB Driver and click. This starts USB driver installation.
(4) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.
(5) Remove the CD-ROM and then restart the computer, in accordance with the instructions on the screen. Note If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again in accordance with the steps on page 182. Windows XP Home Edition/Professional users If you go to USBCONNECT in the menu settings and select PTP, you can copy Memory Stick images from the camcorder onto your computer without installing the USB driver. This is ideal for simply copying images from a camcorder onto a computer. Refer to page 207 for details. V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 179 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users Making the computer recognize the camcorder Viewing images recorded on a tape Refer to page 181 for details on viewing Memory Stick images on your computer. You need to install PIXELA ImageMixer to view images recorded on a tape on your computer. Install it from the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder. To install and use this software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, you must be authorized as Administrators.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. If you are using your computer, close all running applications.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The application software starts up and the title screen appears. If the title screen does not appear, double-click My Computer and then ImageMixer
(CD-ROM Drive). The application software screen appears after a while.
(3) Move the cursor to PIXELA ImageMixer and click. The Install Wizard program starts up and the Select Settings Language screen appears.
(4) Select the language for installation.
(5) Follow the on-screen messages. The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.
(6) Click DirectX. Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX. Restart your computer when the installation is completed.
(7) Connect the AC power adaptor to your camcorder.
(8) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(9) Select USB STREAM in
(10)With the CD-ROM inserted, connect the USB jacks of the camcorder and to ON in the menu settings (p. 207). computer using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder. Your computer recognizes the camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware Wizard starts.
(USB) jack Push into the end USB connector USB cable (supplied) 180 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users
(11)Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts three times because three different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow the installation to complete without interrupting it. For Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional users
(12)After the File Needed screen appears. Open Browse... t My Computer t ImageMixer t Sonyhcb.sys, and click OK. Viewing images recorded on Memory Sticks Before operation Set USBCONNECT in NORMAL.) to NORMAL in the menu settings. (The default setting is
(1) Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(2) Connect the AC power adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY/
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
(3) Connect the
(USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your computer using the supplied USB cable. USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder. Your computer recognizes the camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.
(USB) jack Push into the end USB connector USB cable (supplied)
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow the installation to complete without interrupting it. You cannot install the USB driver if a Memory Stick is not in your camcorder. Be sure to insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder before installing the USB driver. V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 181 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users If you cannot install the USB driver The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Perform the following procedure to correctly install the USB driver. Viewing images recorded on a tape Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. 2 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to VCR. 3 Connect the USB connector on your computer to the
(USB) jack on your camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder. 4 Open your computers Device Manager. Windows XP Home Edition/Professional:
Select Start t Control Panel t System t Hardware, and click the Device Manager button. If there is no System inside Pick a category after clicking Control Panel, click Switch to classic view instead. Windows 2000 Professional:
Select My Computer t Control Panel t System t Hardware tab, and click the Device Manager button. Windows 98SE/Windows Me:
Select My Computer t Control Panel t System, and click Device Manager. 182 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users 5 Select and delete the underlined devices below. Windows 98SE Windows Me V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Home Edition/Professional 183 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Windows users 6 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then disconnect the USB cable. 7 Restart your computer. Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM Perform the entire procedure described in Installing the USB driver on page 179. Viewing images recorded on a Memory Stick Step1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. 2 Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder. 3 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to MEMORY/
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). 4 Connect the USB connector on your computer to the
(USB) jack on your camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder. 5 Open your computers Device Manager. Windows 2000 Professional:
Select My Computer t Control Panel t System t Hardware, and click the Device Manager button. Other OS:
Select My Computer t Control Panel t System, and click Device Manager. 6 Select Other devices. Select the device prefixed with the ? mark and delete. Ex: (?)Sony Handycam 7 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then disconnect the USB cable. 8 Restart your computer. Step2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM Perform the entire procedure described in Installing the USB driver on page 179. 184 Viewing images recorded on a tape on your computer For Windows users Capturing images with PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony You need to install the USB driver and PIXELA ImageMixer to view images recorded on a tape on your computer (p. 179). To install and use the software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, you must be authorized as Administrators. Viewing images recorded on a tape
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Connect the AC power adaptor, and insert a cassette into your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR. Select USB STREAM in to ON in the menu settings (p. 207).
(4) Select Start t Programs t PIXELA t ImageMixer t PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.
(5) Click on the screen. The PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony startup screen appears on your computer. The title screen appears. V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 185 Viewing images recorded on a tape on your computer For Windows users
(6) Select
. Preview window
(7) Connect the
(USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your computer using the supplied USB cable.
(USB) jack Push into the end USB connector
(8) Press N to start playback. The picture from the tape appears on preview window on your computer. USB cable (supplied) 186 Viewing images recorded on a tape on your computer For Windows users Viewing pictures live from your camcorder
(1) Follow the steps 1, 2 on page 185.
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. Select USB STREAM in to ON in the menu settings (p. 207).
(3) Follow the steps 4 to 7 on pages 185, 186. The picture from your camcorder appears on preview window on your computer. Capturing still images Preview window Thumbnail list widow
(1) Select
(2) Looking at the preview window, move the cursor to
. and press it at the point you want to capture. The still image on the screen is captured. Captured images are displayed in the thumbnail list window. V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 187 Viewing images recorded on a tape on your computer For Windows users Capturing moving pictures Preview window Thumbnail list widow
(1) Select
(2) Look at the preview window and click on
. you want to capture. changes to
. at the first scene of the movie
(3) Look at the preview window and click on at the last scene you want to capture. The captured images appear in the thumbnail list window. Notes The following may occur while using your camcorder, and are not due to any malfunction. The image shakes up and down. Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc. Images of different color systems to that of the camcorder are not displayed correctly. When your camcorder is in the standby with a cassette inserted, it turns off automatically after five minutes. We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your camcorder is in the standby, and no cassette is inserted. Indicators in the camcorder LCD screen do not appear on images that are captured into your computer. 188 Viewing images recorded on a tape on your computer For Windows users If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Reinstall the USB driver following the procedure on page 182. If any trouble occurs Close all running applications, then restart your computer. Carry out the following operations after quitting the application:
Disconnect the USB cable. Change the POWER switch to the other position or set the POWER switch to OFF
(CHG) on your camcorder. Seeing the on-line help (operating instructions) of PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony A PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony on-line help site is available where you can find the detailed operating method of PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.
(1) Click located in the upper-right corner of the screen. The ImageMixers Manual screen appears.
(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents. To close on-line help Click at the top right of the screen. If you have any questions about PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony is a trademark of PIXELA corporation. For more information, refer to the instruction manual of the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder. Note on using your computer Communications with your computer Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep. V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 189 Viewing images recorded on a Memory Stick on your computer For Windows users Viewing images Before operation You need to install the USB driver to view Memory Stick images on your computer.
(p. 179) An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving pictures in Windows environment. Set USBCONNECT in to NORMAL in the menu settings. (The default setting is NORMAL.)
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder, and connect the AC power adaptor to your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
(4) Connect the
(USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your computer using the supplied USB cable. USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.
(USB) jack USB connector USB cable (supplied)
(5) Open My Computer on Windows and double-click the newly recognized drive (Example: Removable Disk (E:)). The folders inside the Memory Stick are displayed. 190 Viewing images recorded on a Memory Stick on your computer For Windows users
(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder. For the detailed folder and file name, see Image file storage destinations and image files. Desired file type Still image Moving picture*
Double-click in this order Dcim folder t 100msdcf folder t Image file Mssony folder t Moml0001 folder t Image file*
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If you play back the file directly from the Memory Stick, the image and sound may break off. Image file storage destinations and image files Image files recorded with your camcorder are grouped in folders by recording mode. The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999. For Windows Me users
(The drive recognizing your camcorder is [E:].) Folder containing still image data Folder containing moving picture data Folder 100MSDCF MOML0001 File Meaning DSC0ssss.JPG MOV0ssss.MPG Still image file Moving picture file V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 191 Viewing images recorded on a Memory Stick on your computer For Windows users Disconnect the USB cable and eject the Memory Stick or set the POWER switch to OFF(CHG). For Windows 2000 Professional/Me, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional users To unplug the USB cable, eject the Memory Stick or set the POWER switch to OFF
(CHG) follow the procedure below.
(1) Move the cursor to the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon on the Task Tray and click to cancel the applicable drive.
(2) After the Safe to remove message appears, disconnect the USB cable and eject the Memory Stick or set the POWER switch to OFF(CHG). 192 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Macintosh users When connecting to a computer using the USB cable You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to the computers USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied, along with the application software required for viewing images. Recommended computer usage environment when connecting via USB cable and viewing Memory Stick images on the computer Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0/9.1/9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1) Standard installation is required. However, note that the upgrade to Mac OS 9.0/9.1 should be used for the following models. iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation The USB connector must be provided as standard. QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed (to play back moving pictures). Notes Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub. Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is used simultaneously. mentioned above. Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, TM and are not mentioned in each case in this manual. V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 193 Connecting your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable For Macintosh users Installing the USB driver Do not connect the USB cable to your computer before installation of the USB driver is completed. For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users
(1) Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The application software screen appears.
(3) Click the USB Driver to open the folder containing the six files related to Driver.
(4) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder. Sony Camcorder USB Driver Sony Camcorder USB Shim
(5) When the message appears, click OK. The USB driver is installed on your computer.
(6) Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.
(7) Restart your computer. For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1) The USB driver need not be installed. Your Mac is automatically recognized as a drive just by connecting your Mac using the USB cable. 194 Viewing images recorded on a Memory Stick on your computer For Macintosh users Viewing images Before operation You need to install the USB driver to view Memory Stick images on your computer.
(p. 194) QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Mac OS to load.
(2) Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder, and connect the AC power adaptor to your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
(4) Connect the
(USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your computer using the supplied USB cable. USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.
(5) Double-click the Memory Stick icon on the desktop. The folders inside the Memory Stick are displayed.
(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder. Desired file type Still image Moving picture*
Double-click in this order Dcim folder t 100msdcf folder t Image file Mssony folder t Moml0001 folder t Image file*
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If you play back the file directly from the Memory Stick, the image and sound may break off. Disconnect the USB cable and eject the Memory Stick or set the POWER switch to OFF(CHG) Follow the procedure below.
(1) Close all running applications. Make sure that the access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.
(2) Drag the Memory Stick icon into the Trash. Alternatively, select the Memory Stick icon by clicking on it, and then select Eject disk from the Special menu at the top left of the screen.
(3) Disconnect the USB cable and eject the Memory Stick or the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). For Mac OS X (v10.0) users Shut down your computer, then disconnect the USB cable and eject the Memory Stick or the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). V i e w n g i I m a g e s U s i n g y o u r C o m p u t e r 195 Capturing images from an analog video unit on your computer Signal convert function You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connected to your computer which has the i.LINK (DV) jack connected to your camcorder. Before operation Set DISPLAY in to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then select A/V t DV OUT in to ON with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 202).
(3) Start playback on the analog video unit.
(4) Start procedures for capturing images and sound on your computer. The operation procedures depend on your computer and the software you are using. For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manual of your computer and software you are using. AUDIO/VIDEO DV IN/OUT VCR Yellow White OUT S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO i.LINK Red
: Signal flow A/Vconnecting cable (supplied) i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) After capturing images and sound Stop capturing procedures on your computer , and stop the playback on the analog video unit. Notes You need to install software that supports the exchange video signals. Depending on the state of the video signals, the computer may not be able to output the images correctly when you convert video signals into digital video signals via your camcorder. You cannot record or capture the video output via your camcorder when the video tapes include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system. You can capture images and sound with an S video cable (optional) instead of the A/V connecting cable (supplied). If your computer has a USB connector You can connect using a USB cable, but images may not be transfered smoothly. 196 Using the Network function Accessing the network DCR-TRV50 only You can access the Internet using a Bluetooth equipped device that is complied to the camcorder. Once the access is made, you can view a Web page, send/receive your e-mail, etc. This section describes only how to open the Network Menu.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press NETWORK.
(Bluetooth) lamp lights up and Network Menu appears. For the details, refer to the Network Function Operating Instructions supplied with your camcorder.
(Bluetooth) lamp 1 LOCK POWER VCR OFF(CHG) CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK NETWORK U s i n g t h e N e t w o r k f u n c t i o n 197 Accessing the network How to hold your camcorder when operating in NETWORK mode Hold your camcorder with your hand through the grip belt to keep from dropping it. The operation buttons needed in NETWORK mode are displayed on the LCD screen. Press the buttons with the stylus supplied. After using the stylus Put it back in the holder. Hold the stylus correctly as shown in the illustration and insert it until it clicks. On trademarks The BLUETOOTH trademarks are owned by their proprietor and used by Sony Corporation under license. All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, TM and are not mentioned in each case in this manual. Note Make sure that your camcorder is in the standby with the POWER switch set to MEMORY/NETWORK. During using the network function You cannot use the optional printer. 198 Customizing Your Camcorder Changing the default settings with the menu To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon, then the menu item and then the mode.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only), press MENU.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial
(5) If you want to change other items, select RETURN and press the dial, then repeat steps 2 to 4. For details, see Selecting the mode setting of each item (p. 200). set. set. to set. 1 MENU CAMERA MANUAL SET P EFFECT FLASH LVL WHT BAL N. S. LIGHT AUTO SHTR
[MENU] : END VCR MANUAL SET P EFFECT
[MENU] : END 2 TAPE SET REC MODE AUDIO MODE REMAIN TAPE SET REC MODE AUDIO MODE REMAIN RETURN SP
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END 3 TAPE SET REC MODE AUDIO MODE REMAIN RETURN AUTO or TAPE SET REC MODE AUDIO MODE REMAIN RETURN AUTO ON MEMORY/NETWORK*
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END C u s t o m i z i n g Y o u r C a m c o r d e r MANUAL SET FLASH LVL WHT BAL N. S. LIGHT
[MENU] : END or 4 TAPE SET REC MODE AUDIO MODE REMAIN RETURN AUTO ON TAPE SET REC MODE AUDIO MODE REMAIN RETURN ON
[MENU] : END
[MENU] : END
* DCR-TRV50 only
(continued on the following page) 199 Changing the default settings with the menu To make the menu display disappear Press MENU. Menu items are displayed as the following icons:
MANUAL SET CAMERA SET VCR SET LCD/VF SET MEMORY SET PRINT SET CM SET TAPE SET SETUP MENU OTHERS Selecting the mode setting of each item z is the default setting. Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch. The screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment. The POWER switch is the name of the switch on the DCR-TRV50. It is referred to as MEMORY on the DCR-TRV40. Icon/item Mode Meaning MANUAL SET P EFFECT FLASH LVL HIGH z NORMAL LOW WHT BAL To add special effects like those in films or on the TV to images (p. 60, 75) Makes the flash level higher than normal. Normal setting Makes the flash level lower than normal. To adjust the white balance (p. 54) N.S. LIGHT z ON OFF AUTO SHTR z ON OFF To use the NightShot Light (p. 35) To cancel the NightShot Light To automatically activate the electronic shutter when shooting in bright conditions To not automatically activate the electronic shutter even when shooting in bright conditions POWER switch VCR CAMERA CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK CAMERA Note on FLASH LVL You cannot adjust FLASH LVL if the external flash (optional) is not compatible with the flash level. 200
1 | manual5 | Users Manual | 571.50 KiB | / July 03 2002 |
Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item Mode Meaning CAMERA SET D ZOOM z OFF 20 120 PHOTO REC z MEMORY 16:9WIDE STEADYSHOT FRAME REC INT. REC TAPE z OFF ON z ON OFF z OFF ON ON z OFF SET HOLOGRAM F z AUTO OFF To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 10 zoom is performed. To activate the digital zoom. More than 10 to 20 zoom is performed digitally (p. 31) To activate the digital zoom. More than 10 to 120 zoom is performed digitally To record still images on Memory Sticks when you press PHOTO in the tape recording or tape recording standby (p. 47) To record still images on tape when you press PHOTO in the tape recording or tape recording standby (p. 52) To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 55) To compensate for camera-shake To cancel the SteadyShot. Natural pictures are produced when shooting a stationary object with a tripod. To deactivate Frame recording To activate Frame recording (p. 74) To activate interval recording (p. 72) To deactivate interval recording To set the INTERVAL and REC TIME for interval recording The HOLOGRAM AF emits when focusing on subjects is difficult in dark places (p. 132) The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit. POWER switch CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK C u s t o m i z i n g Y o u r C a m c o r d e r Notes on the SteadyShot The SteadyShot will not correct excessive camera-shake. Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence the SteadyShot. If you cancel the SteadyShot The SteadyShot off indicator compensation for camera-shake. appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive
(continued on the following page) 201 Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item VCR SET Mode Meaning HiFi SOUND z STEREO 1 2 AUDIO MIX A/VtDV OUT z OFF ON To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track tape with main and sub sound (p. 221) To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or a dual sound tape with main sound To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or a dual sound track tape with sub sound To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and stereo 2 (p. 109) ST1 ST2 To output digital images and sound in analog format using your camcorder To output analog images and sound in digital format using your camcorder (p. 196) LCD/VF SET LCD B.L. z BRT NORMAL BRIGHT To set the brightness on the LCD screen to normal To brighten the LCD screen LCD COLOR To adjust the color on the LCD screen, turn the SEL/PUSH EXE dial. VF B.L. z BRT NORMAL BRIGHT To get low-
intensity To get high-
intensity To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to normal To brighten the viewfinder screen POWER switch VCR VCR VCR VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L. When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during When you use power supplies other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically recording. selected. Even if you adjust LCD B.L., LCD COLOR and/or VF B.L. The recorded picture will not be affected. 202 Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item Mode Meaning MEMORY SET STILL SET BURST z OFF NORMAL HIGH SPEED EXP BRKTG MULTI SCRN QUALITY z SUPER FINE FINE STANDARD IMAGESIZE z 1360 1020 640 480 MOVIE SET IMAGESIZE z 320 240 160 112 REMAIN z AUTO To not record continuously. To record from three to nine images continuously (p. 128) To record up to 16 images continuously fast To record three images continuously with different exposure To record nine images continuously, display the images on a single page divided into nine boxes To record still images in the finest image quality mode (p. 122) To record still images in the fine image quality mode To record still images in the standard image quality mode To record still images at 1360 1020 size
(p. 124) To record still images at 640 480 size To record moving pictures at 320 240 size
(p. 124). To record moving pictures at 160 112 size. To display the remaining capacity of the Memory Stick in the following cases:
For five seconds after setting the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) or VCR For five seconds after setting the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) or VCR and inserting a Memory Stick When the remaining capacity of the Memory Stick is less than two minutes after setting the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK
(DCR-TRV50 only) For five seconds from the start of moving For five seconds after completing a moving picture recording picture recording POWER switch MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR MEMORY/
NETWORK MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR MEMORY/
NETWORK C u s t o m i z i n g Y o u r C a m c o r d e r ON To always display the remaining capacity of the Memory Stick
(continued on the following page) 203 Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item Mode Meaning MEMORY SET PHOTO SAVE FILE NO. z SERIES RESET DELETE ALL FORMAT z RETURN OK To copy still images on tape onto Memory Stick (p. 154). To assign numbers to file in sequence even if the Memory Stick is changed To reset the file numbering each time the Memory Stick is changed To delete all unprotected images (p. 170) To cancel formatting To format an inserted Memory Stick Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick Check the contents of the Memory Stick before formatting. 1. Select FORMAT. 2. Select OK with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial. 3. After EXECUTE appears, press SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. FORMATTING flashes during formatting. COMPLETE appears when formatting is finished. POWER switch VCR VCR MEMORY/
NETWORK MEMORY/
NETWORK MEMORY/
NETWORK Notes on formatting Do not do any of the following while FORMATTING is displayed:
Switch the POWER switch Operate buttons Eject the Memory Stick The supplied or optional Memory Stick has been formatted at factory. Formatting Memory Sticks on your camcorder is not required. You cannot format the Memory Stick if the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. Format the Memory Stick when Formatting erases protected image data on the Memory Stick. FORMAT ERROR is displayed. 204 Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item Mode Meaning PRINT SET DATE/TIME z OFF DATE DAY&TIME CM SET TITLE TITLEERASE TITLE DSPL CM SEARCH TAPE TITLE z ON OFF z ON OFF To make prints without the recording date and time To make prints with the recording date (p. 172) To make prints with the recording date and time To superimpose a title or make your own title
(p. 110, 113) To erase the title you have superimposed
(p. 112) To display the title you have superimposed To not display the title To search using cassette memory (p. 80, 81, 83) To search without using cassette memory To label a cassette (p. 115) ERASE ALL To erase all the data in cassette memory (p. 116) POWER switch MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR CAMERA VCR CAMERA VCR VCR VCR CAMERA VCR CAMERA Note on PRINT SET DATE/TIME is displayed only when an external printer (optional) is connected to the intelligent accessory shoe.
(continued on the following page) C u s t o m i z i n g Y o u r C a m c o r d e r 205 Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item Mode Meaning TAPE SET REC MODE AUDIO MODE z SP LP z 12BIT 16BIT qREMAIN z AUTO To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP mode To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds) To record in the 16-bit mode (one stereo sound with high quality) To display the remaining tape bar:
For about eight seconds after a cassette is inserted and your camcorder calculates the remaining amount of tape For about eight seconds after N or DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL is pressed ON To always display the remaining tape indicator POWER switch VCR CAMERA VCR CAMERA VCR CAMERA Notes on the LP mode When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound. When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder. You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the tape to be audio dubbed. When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes. Notes on AUDIO MODE You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode. When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in AUDIO MIX. 206 Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item Mode Meaning SETUP MENU CLOCK SET To set the date or time (p. 20). USB STREAM z OFF ON USBCONNECT z NORMAL PTP To deactivate the USB streaming To activate the USB streaming To connect and recognize the Memory Stick drive. To connect and only copy a Memory Stick image from your camcorder to a computer (only with Windows XP or Mac OS X) 1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select USBCONNECT followed by PTP, then press the dial to set. 2 Insert the Memory Stick in the camcorder, and connect the camcorder to the computer using a USB cable. Copy Wizard will automatically start up. POWER switch CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK LTR SIZE z NORMAL 2 To display selected menu items in normal size To display selected menu items at twice the normal size LANGUAGE z ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL PORTUGUS DEMO MODE z ON OFF To display the following information indicators in English: min, REC, STBY and START. To display the information indicators in French. To display the information indicators in Spanish. To display the information indicators in Portuguese. To display the information indicators in Chinese. To display the information indicators in Korean. To make the demonstration appear To cancel the demonstration VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK C u s t o m i z i n g Y o u r C a m c o r d e r CAMERA Notes on DEMO MODE You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette or a Memory Stick is inserted in your camcorder. When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON, the NIGHTSHOT indicator appears on the screen and you cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings. The DEMO MODE default setting is STBY (Standby) and the demonstration starts about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a cassette and a Memory Stick inserted. To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette or a Memory Stick, set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set to STBY (Standby) again, leave the DEMO MODE at ON in the menu settings, turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and return the POWER switch to CAMERA.
(continued on the following page) 207 Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item OTHERS Mode Meaning DATA CODE*1 z DATE/CAM DATE AREA SET To display date, time and various settings during playback when pressing DATA CODE on the Remote Commander (p. 42) To display date and time during playback when pressing DATA CODE on the Remote Commander Temporarily change the area where you are using your camcorder DST SET*2 z OFF ON Not during daylight saving time During daylight saving time BEEP z MELODY COMMANDER NORMAL OFF z ON OFF To output the melody when you start/stop recording or when an unusual condition occurs on your camcorder To output the beep instead of the melody To cancel all sound including shutter sound To activate the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid erroneous remote control operation caused by other VCRs remote control
*1 When using the Remote Commander.
*2 Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models. POWER switch VCR MEMORY/
NETWORK CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK 208 Changing the default settings with the menu Icon/item Mode Meaning OTHERS DISPLAY z LCD V-OUT/LCD REC LAMP z ON OFF VIDEO EDIT z RETURN TAPE MEMORY To show the display on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder To show the display on the TV screen, LCD screen and in the viewfinder To light up the camera recording lamp at the front of your camcorder To turn the camera recording lamp off so that the person is not aware of the recording To cancel video editing. To make a program and perform video editing
(p. 89) To make program and perform MPEG editing
(p. 151) POWER switch VCR CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK CAMERA MEMORY/
NETWORK VCR Note If you press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR. When recording a close subject When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend that you set REC LAMP to OFF. In more than five minutes after removing the power supply The WHT BAL, FLASH LVL, HiFi SOUND, AUDIO MIX and COMMANDER settings are returned to their default settings. Other menu settings are held in memory even when the battery is removed. C u s t o m i z i n g Y o u r C a m c o r d e r 209 Troubleshooting Types of trouble and how to correct trouble If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power supply and contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If C:ss:ss appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 217. Cause and/or Corrective Actions The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA. c Set it to CAMERA (p. 26). The tape has run out. c Rewind the cassette or insert a new one (p. 23, 44). The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark. c Use a new cassette or slide the tab (p. 23). The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation). c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228). While being operated when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA, your camcorder has been in the standby for more than five minutes. c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to CAMERA. The battery pack is dead or nearly dead. c Install a charged battery pack. PHOTO REC is set to TAPE in the menu settings. c Set it to MEMORY (p. 201). PHOTO REC is set to MEMORY in the menu settings. c Set it to TAPE (p. 201). The viewfinder lens is not adjusted. c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 30). STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON (p. 201). The setting is the manual focus. c Set FOCUS to the autofocus (p. 69). Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus. c Adjust for manual focusing (p. 69). In the recording Symptom START/STOP does not operate. The power goes off. You cannot record still images on a Memory Stick in the tape recording or tape recording standby. You cannot record still images on a tape. The image on the viewfinder screen is not clear. The SteadyShot does not work. The autofocusing does not work. 210 Types of trouble and how to correct trouble Symptom The picture does not appear in the viewfinder. A vertical band appears when you shoot a subject such as lights or a candle flame against a dark background. A vertical band appears when you shoot a very bright subject. Some tiny white spots appear on the screen. An unknown picture is displayed on the screen. The picture is recorded in incorrect or unnatural colors. The picture appears too bright, and the subject does not appear on the screen. The click of the shutter does not sound. Black bands appear when you record TV or computer screen. An external flash (optional) does not work. Cause and/or Corrective Actions The LCD panel is open. c Close the LCD panel (p. 28). The contrast between the subject and background is too high. This is not a malfunction. This is not a malfunction. Slow shutter, Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter is activated. This is not a malfunction. If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu settings without a cassette and a Memory Stick inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration. c Insert a cassette or a Memory Stick and the demonstration stops. You can also cancel DEMO MODE (p. 207). NIGHTSHOT is set to ON. c Set it to OFF (p. 34). NIGHTSHOT is set to ON in a bright place. c Set it to OFF (p. 34). The backlight is active. c Set it off (p. 34). BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 208). Set the STEADYSHOT in the menu settings to OFF
(p. 201). The power of the external flash is off or the power supply is not installed. c Turn on the external flash or install the power supply. Two or more external flashes (optional) are attached. c Only one external flash (optional) can be attached.
(continued on the following page) T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 211 Types of trouble and how to correct trouble In the playback Symptom The tape does not move when a video control button is pressed. The playback button does not work. Cause and/or Corrective Actions The POWER switch is not set to VCR. c Set it to VCR (p. 40). The cassette has run out of tape. c Rewind the tape (p. 40). There are horizontal lines on the picture, or the playback picture is not clear or does not appear. No sound or only a low sound is heard when playing back a tape. During displaying the recorded date, date search does not work. The title search does not work. The video heads may be dirty. c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)
(p. 229). The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2 in the menu settings. c Set it to STEREO (p. 202). The volume is turned to minimum. c Turn up the volume (p. 40). AUDIO MIX is set to ST2 in the menu settings. c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 202). The cassette has no cassette memory. c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 81). CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON (p. 205). The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
(p. 82). The cassette has no cassette memory. c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 80). CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON (p. 205). There is no title in the tape. c Superimpose the titles (p. 110). The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
(p. 80). The new sound added to the recorded tape is not heard. The title is not displayed. AUDIO MIX is set to the ST1 side in the menu settings. c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 109). TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON (p. 205). 212 Types of trouble and how to correct trouble In the recording and playback Symptom The power does not turn on. The end search does not work. The end search does not work correctly. The battery pack is quickly discharged. The battery remaining time indicator does not indicate the correct time. The power goes off although the battery remaining time indicator indicates that the battery pack has enough power to operate. The cassette cannot be removed from the holder. The % and Z indicators flash and no functions except for cassette ejection work. indicator does not appear when using a cassette with cassette memory. Remaining tape indicator is not displayed. Cause and/or Corrective Actions The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead. c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16). The AC power adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet. c Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall outlet (p. 19). The cassette was ejected after recording when using a cassette without cassette memory (p. 38). You have not recorded on the new cassette yet (p. 39). The tape has a blank portion at the beginning or midway
(p. 38). The operating temperature is too low. The battery pack is not fully charged. c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16). The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15). You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold environment for a long time. The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15). The battery is not fully charged. c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16). A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time. c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining indicator is correct (p. 16). A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time. c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining battery time indicator is correct
(p. 16). The power supply is disconnected. c Connect it firmly (p. 15, 19). The battery is dead. c Use a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16). Moisture condensation has occurred. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228). The gold-plated connector of the cassette is dirty or dusty. c Clean the gold-plated connector (p. 222). The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings. c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator (p. 206).
(continued on the following page) T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 213 Types of trouble and how to correct trouble When operating using the Memory Stick Symptom The Memory Stick does not function. Recording does not function. The image cannot be deleted. You cannot format the Memory Stick. Deleting all the images cannot be carried out. You cannot protect the image. You cannot write a print mark on the still image. The photo save does not work. You cannot play back images in actual size. You cannot play back image data. 214 Cause and/or Corrective Actions The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY/NETWORK
(DCR-TRV50 only). c Set it to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
(p. 126). The Memory Stick is not inserted. c Insert a Memory Stick (p. 119). The Memory Stick has already been full. c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 168). The Memory Stick formatted incorrectly is inserted. c Format the Memory Stick or use another Memory Stick (p. 119, 204). The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. c Release the lock (p. 117). The image is protected. c Cancel image protection (p. 167). The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. c Release the lock (p. 117). The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. c Release the lock (p. 117). The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. c Release the lock (p. 117). The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. c Release the lock (p. 117). c Press INDEX to display the INDEX screen and protect INDEX screen is not displayed. the image (p. 167). The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. c Release the lock (p. 117). c The print marks cannot be written to the single screen INDEX screen is not displayed.
(p. 171). again (p. 168). The Memory Stick is full. c Delete unnecessary print marks and write a print mark You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture. c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture. The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. c Release the lock (p. 117). You may not be able to play back images in actual size when you try to play back images recorded by other equipment. This is not a malfunction. Your camcorder cannot play back some images processed with a computer (The file name will blink). If you record images with any other equipment, the images may not play back normally on your camcorder. Types of trouble and how to correct trouble Others Symptom The title is not recorded. The cassette label is not recorded. Digital program editing to a tape does not function. Digital program editing to a Memory Stick does not function. The Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder does not work. Cause and/or Corrective Actions The cassette has no cassette memory. c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 110). The cassette memory is full. c Erase unwanted titles (p. 112). The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure. c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible (p. 23). The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions. c Superimpose the title to recorded positions (p. 110). The cassette has no cassette memory. c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 115). The cassette memory is full. c Erase unwanted data (p. 112). The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure. c Slide the write-protect tab so that red mark is not visible
(p. 23). The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly. c Check the connection and set the input selector on the VCR again (p. 89) The camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other than Sony using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable). c Set it to IR (p. 94). You have attempted to set a program on a blank portion of the tape. c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 97). The camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized. c Adjust the synchronization (p. 95). The IR SETUP code is incorrect. c Set the correct code (p. 91). T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is attempted. c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 151). COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings. c Set it to ON (p. 208). Something is blocking the infrared rays. c Remove the obstacle. The batteries are inserted with + and incorrectly matching + and inside the battery compartment. c Insert the batteries correctly (p. 243). The batteries are dead. c Insert new ones (p. 243). The picture from a TV or VCR does not appear even when your camcorder is connected to output on the TV or VCR. DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings. c Set it to LCD (p. 209).
(continued on the following page) 215 Types of trouble and how to correct trouble Symptom The melody or beep sounds for five seconds. You cannot charge the battery pack. While charging the battery pack, no indicator appears, the indicator flashes in the display window. No function works though the power is on. When you set the POWER switch to VCR or OFF (CHG), if you move your camcorder, you may hear a clattering sound from inside your camcorder. The buttons do not appear on the touch panel. The buttons on the LCD screen do not work. The indicators appear mirror-
reversed in the viewfinder or on the TV screen. Image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection. Cause and/or Corrective Actions Moisture condensation has occurred. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228). Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder. c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder. The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG). c Set it to OFF (CHG) (p. 16). The battery pack is not properly installed. c Install it properly (p. 15). Something is wrong with the battery pack. c Please contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery, then reconnect it in about one minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, press the RESET button using a sharp-pointed object (If you press the RESET button, all the settings including the date and time return to their defaults.) (p. 15, 19, 240). This is because some functions use a linear mechanism. Your camcorder is not malfunctioning. The DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button is pressed. c Press the LCD screen lightly. c Press the DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button on your camcorder or the DISPLAY button on the Remote Commander (p. 42). Adjust the screen (CALIBRATION) (p. 230). The mirror mode is activated. This is not a malfunction. The USB cable was connected before installation of the USB driver was completed. c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and re-install the USB driver (p. 179, 182). USBCONNECT is set to PTP in the menu settings when the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only). c Set it to NORMAL (p. 207). The cassette cannot be removed even if the cassette lid is open. Moisture has started to condense in your camcorder
(p. 228). 216 Self-diagnosis display Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display function. This function displays the current state of your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a letter and figures) on the screen. If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following list of codes. The last two digits (indicated by ss) differ depending on the state of your camcorder. LCD screen, viewfinder or display window C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display C:ss:ss You can service your camcorder yourself. E:ss:ss Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. Five-digit display C:04:ss Cause and/or Corrective Actions You are using a battery pack that is not an InfoLITHIUM battery pack. c Use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack (p. 18, 223). C:21:ss C:22:ss C:31:ss C:32:ss E:20:ss E:61:ss E:62:ss E:91:ss Moisture condensation has occurred. c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228). The video heads are dirty. c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)
(p. 229). A malfunction other than the above that you can service has occurred. c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder. c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power supply, operate your camcorder. A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred. c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code
(example: E:61:10). If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 217 Warning indicators and messages If indicators and messages appear on the screen or in the display window, check the following:
See the page in parentheses (
Warning indicators
) for more information. 1000001 C:21:00 100-0001 Warning indicator as to file Slow flashing:
The file is corrupted. The file is unreadable. You are trying to use the MEMORY MIX on a moving picture (p. 139). C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 217). E The battery is dead or nearly dead Slow flashing:
The battery is nearly dead. Depending on the operating conditions, environment and battery condition, the E indicator may flash even if there are approximately five to 10 minutes remaining. Fast flashing:
The battery is dead (p. 16).
% Moisture condensation has occurred*
Fast flashing:
Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette compartment open (p. 228). Warning indicator as to cassette memory*
Slow flashing:
No cassette with cassette memory is inserted
(p. 220). Warning indicator as to Memory Stick*
Slow flashing:
No Memory Stick is inserted. Fast flashing:
The Memory Stick is not readable on your camcorder (p. 117). The image cannot be recorded on Memory Stick. Warning indicator as to Memory Stick formatting*
Fast flashing:
Memory Stick is not formatted correctly
(p. 204). The Memory Stick data is corrupted
(p. 117). Q Warning indicator as to tape Slow flashing:
The tape is near the end. No cassette is inserted.*
The write-protect tab on the cassette is exposed (red) (p. 23).*
Fast flashing:
The cassette has run out of tape.*
Z You need to eject the cassette*
Slow flashing:
The write-protect tab on the cassette is exposed (red) (p. 23). Fast flashing:
Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 228). The cassette has run out of tape. The self-diagnosis display function is activated (p. 217).
- The image is protected*
Slow flashing:
The image is protected (p. 167). Warning indicator as to the flash Slow flashing:
During charging Fast flashing:
The self-diagnosis display function is activated (p. 217).*
There is something wrong with the built-in flash or the external flash (optional). 218
* You hear the melody or beep. Warning indicator as to recording of still image Slow image:
The still image cannot be recorded on a tape or a Memory Stick (p. 47, 52). Warning indicators and messages Warning messages CLOCK SET FOR InfoLITHIUM BATTERY ONLY Set the date and time (p. 20). Use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack (p. 18). CLEANING CASSETTE** The video heads are dirty (p. 229). FULL 16BIT REC MODE TAPE i.LINK CABLE FULL
-
NO FILE NO MEMORY STICK AUDIO ERROR MEMORY STICK ERROR FORMAT ERROR
- DIRECTORY ERROR PLAY ERROR REC ERROR COPY INHIBIT Q Z TAPE END Q NO TAPE NO PRINT MARK NO STILL IMAGE FILE DELETING FORMATTING NOW CHARGING The cassette memory is full.*
AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT (p. 206).* You cannot dub new audio. REC MODE is set to LP (p. 206).* You cannot dub new audio. There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot dub new audio. The i.LINK cable is connected (p. 109).* You cannot dub new audio. The Memory Stick is full (p. 129).*
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK (p. 117).*
No still image is recorded on the Memory Stick
(p. 157).*
No Memory Stick is inserted.*
You are trying to record an image with sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder on Memory Stick (p. 148).*
The Memory Stick data is corrupted (p. 119).*
The Memory Stick is not recognized. Check the format (p. 204).*
There are more than two of the same directories
(p. 157).*
The image cannot be played back. Reinsert the Memory Stick, then play back the image again. Check the input signal before retrying recording
(p. 138, 150).*
The tape contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software (p. 221).*
The tape has reached its end.*
Insert a cassette.*
You selected MARKED in 9PIC PRINT on the touch panel using a Memory Stick containing no image with a print mark. (p. 173)*
You selected MULTI in 9PIC PRINT on the touch panel using a Memory Stick containing no still image. (p. 173)*
You have pressed PHOTO during deleting all images on Memory Stick.*
You have pressed PHOTO during formatting a Memory Stick.*
Charging an external flash (optional) does not work correctly.*
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
* You hear the melody or beep.
**The x indicator and another on the screen. CLEANING CASSETTE message appear one after 219 Additional Information Usable cassettes Selecting cassette types You can use Digital8, ED Betamax, mini DV cassettes only*. You cannot use any other S-VHSC, 8 mm, Betamax, Hi8, VHS, DV or VHSC, S-VHS, MICRO MV cassette.
* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette memory. Cassettes with cassette memory have the We recommend that you use cassette with cassette memory.
(Cassette Memory) mark. IC memory is mounted on this type of cassette. Your camcorder can read and write data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this memory. The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the tape. If the tape has a blank portion at the beginning or between recorded portions, titles may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work properly. Perform the following to prevent a blank portion from being made on the tape. Press END SEARCH to go to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the next recording if you operate the following:
You have ejected the cassette while recording. You have played back the tape. You have used the edit search. If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the beginning to the end of the tape as described above. The same result may occur when you record using a digital video camera recorder without a cassette memory on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory. mark on the cassette The memory capacity of cassettes marked with is 4Kbit. Your camcorder can accommodate tapes having a memory capacity of up to 16Kbit. 16Kbit cassettes are marked with
. This is the mini DV mark. This is the Cassette Memory mark. These are trademarks. 220 Usable cassettes Copyright signal When you play back Using any other video camera recorder, you cannot record on tape that has recorded copyright control signals for copyright protection of software which is played back on your camcorder. When you record You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of software. COPY INHIBIT appears on the screen or on the TV screen if you try to record such software. Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records. Audio mode 12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback. Both sounds can be played back. 16-bit mode: New audio cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in high quality. Moreover, your camcorder can also play back sound recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on screen. When you play back a dual sound track tape When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 202). Sound from speaker HiFi SOUND mode Playing back a stereo tape STEREO Stereo 1 2 Left sound Right sound Playing back a dual sound track tape Main sound and sub sound Main sound Sub sound You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder. A d d i t i o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n 221 Usable cassettes Notes on the cassette When affixing a label on the cassette Be sure to affix a label only at the locations illustrated below [a] to prevent malfunction of your camcorder. After using the cassette Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it upright. When the cassette memory does not work Reinsert a cassette. The gold-plated connector of the cassette may be dirty or dusty. Cleaning the gold-plated connector If the gold-plated connector on the cassette is dirty or dusty, the remaining tape indicator is sometimes not displayed correctly, and you may not be able to operate functions using cassette memory. Clean the gold-plated connector with a cotton-wool swab, about every 10 times that the cassette is ejected. [b]
Do not affix a label along this border.
[a]
[b]
222 About the InfoLITHIUM battery pack What is the InfoLITHIUM battery pack?
The InfoLITHIUM battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for communicating information related to operating conditions between the battery pack and an optional AC adaptor/charger. The InfoLITHIUM battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in minutes. With an AC adaptor/charger (optional), the remaining battery time and charging time are displayed. Charging the battery pack Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder. We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10C to 30C (50F to 86F) until FULL appears in the display window, indicating that the battery pack is fully charged. If you charge the battery outside of this temperature range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack. After charging is completed, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your camcorder or remove the battery pack. Effective use of the battery pack Battery pack performance decreases in low-temperature surroundings. So, the time that the battery pack can be used becomes shorter. We recommend the following to ensure longer battery pack use:
Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up, and insert it in your camcorder immediately before you start taking shots. Use the large-capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/QM71/FM90/FM91/QM91, optional). Frequently using the LCD panel or frequently operating playback, fast forward or rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large-capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/QM71/FM90/FM91/QM91, optional). Be sure to turn off the power switch when not taking shots or playing back on your camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is in the standby or playback pause. Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time, and make trial recordings before taking the actual recording. Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant. Remaining battery time indicator If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the battery pack has enough power to operate, fully charge the battery pack again so that the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate recording time. The E mark indicating that there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even if the remaining battery time is about five to 10 minutes.
(Continued on the following page) A d d i t i o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n 223 About the InfoLITHIUM battery pack How to store the battery pack If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per year to maintain proper function. 1. Fully charge the battery. 2. Discharge on your electronic equipment. 3. Remove the battery from the equipment and store it in a dry, cool place. To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder in the recording standby until the power goes off without a cassette inserted. Battery life The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably, a probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new battery pack. The battery life varies according to how it is stored and operating conditions and environment for each battery pack. 224 About i.LINK The DV jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV input/output jack. This section describes the i.LINK standard and its features. What is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling other equipment. i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment. When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected equipment. Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment. Note Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK cable (DV cable). When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the operating instructions of the equipment to be connected. About the name i.LINK i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a trademark approved by many corporations. IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. i.LINK baud rate i.LINKs maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are defined:
S100 (approx. 100Mbps*) S200 (approx. 200Mbps) S400 (approx. 400Mbps) The baud rate is listed under Specifications in the operating instructions of each equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment. The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is S100. When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.
*What is Mbps?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or received in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100Mbps means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in one second. A d d i t i o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n 225 About i.LINK i.LINK functions on this unit For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having DV jacks, see page 88 and 102. This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV) compatible equipment made by SONY (e.g. VAIO series personal computer) other than video equipment. Before connecting this unit to a personal computer, make sure that application software supported by this unit is already installed on the personal computer. For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating instructions of the equipment to be connected. Required i.LINK cable Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing). i.LINK and are trademarks. 226 Using your camcorder abroad Using your camcorder abroad Countries and areas where you can use network functions are restricted. For details, refer to the separate Network Operating Instructions. (DCR-TRV50 only) You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a], if necessary, depending on the design of the wall outlet [b]. AC-L10A/L10B/L10C
[a]
[b]
Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with the AUDIO/VIDEO input jack. The following shows TV color systems used overseas. NTSC system Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. PAL system Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, United Kingdom etc. PAL-M system Brazil PAL-N system Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay SECAM system Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc. A d d i t i o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n 227 Maintenance information and precautions Moisture condensation If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this state, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep and the %
indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear. If moisture condensation has occurred None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette lid open. Your camcorder can be used again if the % indicator does not appear when the power is turned on again. If moisture starts to condense, your camcorder sometimes cannot detect condensation. If this happens, the cassette is sometimes not ejected for 10 seconds after the cassette lid is opened. This is not a malfunction. Do not close the cassette lid until the cassette is ejected. Note on moisture condensation Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:
You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by heating device. You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place outside. You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower. You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humid place. How to prevent moisture condensation When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour). 228 Maintenance information and precautions Maintenance information Cleaning the video heads To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video heads may be dirty when:
Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture. Playback pictures do not move. Playback pictures do not appear. The x indicator and or the x indicator flashes on the screen during recording. CLEANING CASSETTE message appear one after another, If the above problem [a], [b] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the Sony DVM-12CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above problem persists, repeat cleaning.
[a]
[b]
[c]
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c]. Cleaning the LCD screen If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using the Cleaning cloth (supplied) to clean the LCD screen. When you use the LCD Cleaning Kit
(optional), do not apply the cleaning liquid directly to the LCD screen. Clean the LCD screen with cleaning paper moistened with the liquid. A d d i t i o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n 229 Maintenance information and precautions Adjusting the LCD screen (CALIBRATION) The buttons on the touch panel may not work correctly. If this happens, follow the procedure below.
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
(2) Eject the cassette from your camcorder, then disconnect any connecting cable from your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder, then keep pressing DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL for about five seconds.
(4) Follow the procedure below using an object such as the corner of a Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder. You can use the supplied stylus for this operation (DCR-TRV50 only). 1 Touch 2 Touch 3 Touch at the upper left corner. at the lower right corner. in the middle of the screen. CALIBRATE CALIBRATE CALIBRATE Note If you do not press the right spot, corner. In this case, start from step 4 again. always returns to the position at the upper left PB INDEX FN 230 Maintenance information and precautions Charging the built-in rechargeable battery Your camcorder has a built-in rechargeable battery so that the date, time and other settings are retained even when the POWER switch is turned off. The built-in rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The battery, however, will become discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It will be completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not affect camcorder operation. To retain the date, time, and other information, charge the battery if the battery is discharged. Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:
Connect your camcorder to house current using the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the power switch turned off for more than 24 hours. Or, install a charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours. Precautions Camcorder operation Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor). For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in these operating instructions. If any solid object or liquid gets inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further. Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens. Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder. Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so might cause heat to build up inside. Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration. Do not press the LCD screen with sharp objects other than the stylus supplied. (DCR-
If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD screen. This is not a malfunction. While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a TRV50 only) malfunction. On handling tapes Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out. Do not open the cassette protect cover or touch the tape. Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with a soft cloth. A d d i t i o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n 231 Maintenance information and precautions Camcorder care Remove the cassette, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is not to be used for a long time. Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens, remove them with a soft cloth. Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the finish. Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired. AC power adaptor Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using it for a long time. To disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself. Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or damaged. Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage the cord and may cause fire or electric shock. Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged. Always keep metal contacts clean. Do not disassemble the unit. Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit. While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and video operation. The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction. Do not place the unit in locations that are:
Extremely hot or cold Dusty or dirty Very humid Vibrating About care and storage of the lens Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instances:
When there are fingerprints on the lens surface In hot or humid locations When the lens is used in environments such as the seaside Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust. To prevent mold from growing, periodically perform the above. We recommend turning on and operating the video camera recorder about once per month to keep the video camera recorder in an optimum state for a long time. 232 Maintenance information and precautions Battery pack Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function. To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the battery terminals. Keep the battery pack away from fire. Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60C (140F), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight. Keep the battery pack dry. Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock. Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack. Attach the battery pack to the video equipment securely. Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity. Notes on dry batteries To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:
Be sure to insert the batteries with the + and correctly matching the + and inside the battery compartment. Dry batteries are not rechargeable. Do not use a combination of new and old batteries. Do not use different types of batteries. Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time. Do not use leaking batteries. If batteries are leaking Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries. If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water. If the liquid gets into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a doctor. If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer. A d d i t i o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n 233 Wireless communications
(DCR-TRV50 only) Communications system Bluetooth standard Ver.1.1 Max. baud rate1) 2) Approx. 723 kbps Output Bluetooth standard Power Class 2 Communications distance2) Max. wireless distance Approx. 10 m (393 3/4 in.) (When connecting to BTA-NW1) Compatible Bluetooth profile3) Generic Access Profile Dial-up Networking Profile Operating frequency band 2.4 GHz band (2.400 GHz 2.483 5 GHz) 1) Max. baud rate of Bluetooth standard Ver.1.1 2) Varies according to the distance between communicating devices, presence of obstacles, radiowave conditions, and other factors. 3) This is a specification matched to specific usage requirements between Bluetooth compatible devices. It is laid down in the Bluetooth standards. Specifications Video camera recorder System Video recording system 2 rotary heads Helical scanning system Audio recording system Rotary heads, PCM system Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz, stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo) Video signal NTSC color, EIA standards Usable cassette Mini DV cassette with the mark printed Tape speed SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s Recording/playback time
(using cassette DVM60) SP: 1 hour LP: 1.5 hours Fastforward/rewind time
(using cassette DVM60) When using the battery pack:
Approx. 2 min. and 30 seconds When using the AC power adaptor:
Approx. 1 min. and 45 seconds Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color) Image device 4.5 mm (1/4 type) CCD (Charge Coupled Device) Gross: Approx. 1 550 000 pixels Effective (still):
Approx. 1 390 000 pixels Effective (moving):
Approx. 970 000 pixels Lens Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar Combined power zoom lens Filter diameter: 37 mm
(1 1/2 in) 10 (Optical), 120 (Digital) F = 1.8 ~ 2.2 Focal length 4.2 42 mm (3/16 1 11/16 in.) When converted to a 35 mm still camera In CAMERA:
48 480 mm (1 15/16 19 in.) In MEMORY:
40 400 mm (1 5/8 15 3/4 in.) Color temperature Auto, HOLD (Hold), nIndoor
(3 200 K), Outdoor (5 800 K) Minimum illumination 7 lx (lux) (F 1.8) 0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*
* Objects unable to be seen due to the dark can be shot with infrared lighting. Input/Output connectors S video input/output 4-pin mini DIN Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms), unbalanced Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 (ohms), unbalanced Audio/Video input/output AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms), unbalanced, sync negative 327 mV, (at output impedance more than 47 k (kilohms)) Output impedance with less than 2.2 k (kilohms)/Stereo minijack
( 3.5 mm) Input impedance more than 47 k (kilohms) DV input/output 4-pin connector Headphone jack Stereo minijack ( 3.5 mm) LANC jack Stereo mini-minijack ( 2.5 mm) USB jack mini-B MIC jack Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output impedance 6.8 k (kilohms) ( 3.5 mm) Stereo type LCD screen Picture 8.8 cm (3.5 type) 72.2 50.4 mm (2 4/5 2 in.) Total dot number 246 400 (1 120 220) 234 Battery pack Maximum output voltage DC 8.4 V Output voltage DC 7.2 V Capacity 8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh) Dimensions (approx.) 38.2 20.5 55.6 mm
(1 9/16 13/16 2 1/4 in.)
(w/h/d) Mass (approx.) 76 g (2.7 oz) Type Lithium ion Memory Stick Memory Flash memory 8MB: MSA-8A Operating voltage 2.7 3.6 V Power consumption Approx. 45 mA in the operating mode Approx. 130 A in the standby mode Dimensions (approx.) 50 2.8 21.5 mm
(2 1/8 7/8 in.) (w/h/d) Mass (approx.) 4 g (0.14 oz) Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Specifications General Power requirements 7.2 V (battery pack) 8.4 V (AC power adaptor) Average power consumption
(when using the battery pack) During camera recording using LCD 4.5 W Viewfinder 3.4 W Operating temperature 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) Storage temperature 20C to + 60C
(4F to + 140F) Dimensions (Approx.) 72 91 168 mm
(2 7/8 3 5/8 6 5/8 in.) (w/h/d) Mass (Approx.) 700 g (1 lb 8 oz) main unit only 800 g (1 lb 12 oz) including the battery pack NP-FM50, cassette DVM60 and lens cap Supplied accessories See page 14. AC power adaptor Power requirements 100 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Power consumption 23 W Output voltage DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the operating mode Operating temperature 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) Storage temperature 20C to + 60C
(4F to + 140F) Dimensions (approx.) 125 39 62 mm
(5 1 9/16 2 1/2 in.) (w/h/d) excluding projecting parts Mass (approx.) 280 g (9.8 oz) excluding power cord A d d i t i o n a l I n f o r m a t i o n 235 Quick Reference Identifying parts and controls Camcorder 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 q;
1 Flash (p. 49, 130) 2 Focus ring (p. 69) 3 Lens 4 Camera recording lamp (p. 26) 5 Infrared rays emitter (p. 34, 92) 6 Microphone 7 Remote sensor 8 Viewfinder (p. 30) 9 Display window (p. 16) 0 HOLOGRAM AF emitter (p. 132) Note on the Carl Zeiss lens Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which can reproduce fine images. The lens for your camcorder was developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and Sony Corporation. It adopts the MTF# measurement system for video camera and offers a quality as the Carl Zeiss lens.
# MTF Stands for Modulation Transfer Function. The value number indicates the amount of light of a subject coming into the lens. 236 Identifying parts and controls qa qs qd qf qg qh qa PHOTO button (p. 47, 52, 126) qs LOCK switch (p. 26) qd DC IN jack cover qf DC IN jack (p. 19) qg START/STOP button (p. 26) qh POWER switch (p. 26) qj qk ql w;
wa qj EDITSEARCH button (p. 38) qk NIGHTSHOT switch (p. 34) ql
(Bluetooth) lamp (DCR-TRV50 only)
(p. 197) w; SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S button
(p. 34) wa Stylus (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198) Q u i c k R e f e r e n c e 237 Identifying parts and controls ws wd wf wg wh wj wk wl e;
ea es ed ef ws Power zoom lever (p. 31, 77, 164) wd BATT release button (p. 15) wf Hooks for shoulder strap wg Memory Stick slot (p. 119) wh (USB) jack (p. 174) wj
(flash) button (p. 49, 130) wk DV IN/OUT jack (p. 88, 102, 138, 150) wl
(LANC) jack (blue) e; Jack cover (p. 46) ea MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (red) Connect an external microphone
(optional). This jack also accepts a plug-in-power microphone. es S VIDEO ID-2 jack (p. 46, 86, 137, 149) ed i (headphones) jack (green) When you use headphones, the speaker on your camcorder is silent. ef AUDIO/VIDEO jack (yellow) (p. 46, 86, 137, 149) 238 Identifying parts and controls eg eh ej ek el r;
ra REW PLAY FF STOP PAUSE REC eg Intelligent accessory shoe (p. 106) eh LCD/Touch panel screen (p. 24, 29, 120) ej Speaker ek VOLUME buttons (p. 40) el DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button (p. 42) r; MENU button (p. 199) ra Video control buttons x STOP (stop) m REW (rewind) N PLAY (playback) M FF (fastforward) X PAUSE (pause) z REC (record) Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video light or microphone. The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the accessory for further information. The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten the screw. To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the accessory. Q u i c k R e f e r e n c e 239 Identifying parts and controls rs rd rf rg rh rj rk rl t;
ta rs OPEN button (p. 26) rd FOCUS switch (p. 69) rf RESET button (p. 216) rg FADER button (p. 58) rh BACK LIGHT button (p. 34) rj Viewfinder lens adjustment lever
(p. 30) rk NETWORK button (DCR-TRV50 only)
(p. 197) rl SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 199) t; PROGRAM AE button ta EXPOSURE button (p. 67) 240 Identifying parts and controls ts td tf tg th tj tk tl y;
ts Access lamp td Battery pack (p. 15) tf OPEN/EJECT lever (p. 23) tg Cassette compartment th Grip strap tj Holder (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198) Fastening the grip strap Fasten the grip strap firmly. tk Lens cap (p. 26) tl Cassette lid (p. 23) y; Tripod receptacle Make sure that the length of the tripod screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod securely, and the screw may damage your camcorder. 21 3 4 Q u i c k R e f e r e n c e 241 Identifying parts and controls Remote Commander The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder function identically to the buttons on your camcorder. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 qa qs qd qf 1 PHOTO button (p. 47, 52, 126) 2 DISPLAY button (p. 42) 3 Memory control buttons 4 SEARCH MODE button (p. 80, 81, 83) 5 Video control buttons (p. 44) 6 REC button 7 MARK button (p. 97) 8 Transmitter Point toward the remote sensor to control your camcorder after turning on your camcorder. 9 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 79) q; START/STOP button (p. 26) qa DATA CODE button (p. 42) qs Power zoom button (p. 31) qd ./> buttons (p. 80, 81, 83) qf AUDIO DUB button (p. 108) 242 Identifying parts and controls To prepare the Remote Commander Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and on the batteries to the + and in the battery compartment. Notes on the Remote Commander Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly. Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper. Q u i c k R e f e r e n c e 243 Identifying parts and controls Operation indicators LCD screen and Viewfinder Display window 1 2 3 4 5 6 120min STBY
+
STILL 16:9WIDE NEG. ART 0:12:34 12min ZERO SET MEMORY END SEARCH DV IN 16BIT 1000001 AUTO 60 AWB F1.8 9db 7 8 9 0 qa qs 1 Cassette memory (p. 33, 220) 2 Remaining battery time (p. 33) 3 Zoom (p. 31)/Exposure (p. 67)/
Data file name (p. 117) 4 Digital effect (p. 61, 76)/MEMORY MIX
(p. 139)/FADER (p. 57) 5 16:9WIDE (p. 55) 6 Picture effect (p. 60, 75) 7 Data code (p. 42) 8 Volume (p. 40)/Date (p. 33) 9 PROGRAM AE (p. 64) 0 Backlight (p. 34) qa SteadyShot off (p. 201) qs Manual focus/Infinity (p. 69) qd Self-timer (p. 37, 51, 134) qf Recording mode (p. 33) qg HOLOGRAM AF (p. 132) qh STBY/REC (p. 33)/Video control mode
(p. 44)/Image size (p. 124)/Image quality (p. 122) qj NIGHTSHOT (p. 34)/SUPER NIGHTSHOT
(p. 35) COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (p. 35) 244 qd qf qg qh qj qk ql w;
wa ws wd wf wg wh wj wl wk B qk Warning (p. 218) ql Tape counter (p. 33)/Time code
(p. 33)/Self-diagnosis (p. 217)/Tape photo (p. 52)/Memory photo (p. 126)/
Image number (p. 157) w; Remaining tape (p. 33)/Memory playback (p. 157) wa ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 79) ws END SEARCH (p. 38) wd A/V t DV (p. 196)/DV IN (p. 103) wf Audio mode (p. 206) wg Data file name (p. 117)/Time (p. 33) wh Flash (p. 49, 130) This indicator appears only when the flash is in use. wj Continuous photo recording (p. 128) wk Remaining battery time indicator (p. 33)/Tape counter (p. 33)/Memory counter (p. 33)/Time code indicator (p. 33)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 217) wl FULL charge indicator (p. 16) Index A, B AC power adaptor .................. 16 Adjusting viewfinder ............. 30 Audio dubbing ...................... 106 AUDIO MIX .......................... 202 Audio mode ........................... 206 Auto red-eye reduction
........................................ 49, 130 AUTO SHTR .......................... 200 A/V connecting cable
.......... 46, 86, 100, 137, 149, 196 BACK LIGHT .......................... 34 Battery pack ............................. 15 BEEP ....................................... 208 BOUNCE .................................. 57 C, D CALIBRATION ..................... 230 Camera chroma key ............. 139 Cassette memory ............ 12, 220 Charging battery ..................... 16 Charging built-in rechargeable battery ................................. 231 Clock set ................................... 20 Color Slow Shutter ................. 35 Continuous photo recording
.............................................. 128 Data code ................................. 42 Date search .............................. 81 DEMO ..................................... 207 Digital effect ...................... 61, 76 Digital program editing
........................................ 89, 151 DISPLAY .................................. 42 DOT .......................................... 57 Dual sound track tape .......... 221 DV connecting cable
................................ 88, 138, 196 E EDITSEARCH ......................... 38 END SEARCH ................... 38, 44 EXP BRKTG ........................... 128 Exposure .................................. 67 F, G, H FADER ..................................... 57 Fade in/out .............................. 57 Flash .................................. 49, 130 FLASH MOTION .................... 61 Flexible Spot Meter ................. 68 FOCUS ...................................... 69 Format ............................ 117, 204 Frame recording ...................... 74 Full charge ............................... 16 Grip strap ............................... 241 i (Headphone) jack ............. 238 Heads ...................................... 229 HiFi SOUND ......................... 202 HIGH SPEED ........................ 128 HOLOGRAM AF .................. 132 I, J, K, L i.LINK ..................................... 225 Image protection ................... 167 Image quality ........................ 122 Image size .............................. 124 Index screen ........................... 158 InfoLITHIUM battery ...... 223 Infrared rays emitter ......... 34, 92 Insert editing ......................... 104 Intelligent accessory shoe .... 239 Interval recording ................... 72 JPEG ........................................ 117 Labeling a cassette ................ 115 LANC jack ............................. 238 LUMINANCE KEY ................ 61 M, N Main sound ............................ 221 Manual focus ........................... 69 Memory chroma key ............ 139 Memory luminance key ....... 139 MEMORY MIX ...................... 139 Memory PB ZOOM .............. 164 Memory photo recording .... 126 Memory Stick .................... 117 Memory Stick recording capacity ............................... 125 Menu settings ........................ 199 Memory overlap ................... 139 M. FADER ................................ 57 Mirror mode ............................ 32 Moisture condensation ........ 228 MONOTONE .......................... 57 MPEG ..................................... 117 MPEG movie recording ....... 144 MULTI SCRN ........................ 128 NETWORK ............................ 197 Nightshot ................................. 34 NTSC system ......................... 227 O, P, Q OLD MOVIE ............................ 61 Operation indicators ............ 244 OVERLAP ................................ 57 Photo save .............................. 154 Photo scan ................................ 85 Photo search ............................ 83 Picture effect ...................... 60, 75 Picture search .......................... 44 Playback pause ........................ 44 Playing time ............................. 18 Power zoom ............................. 31 Print mark .............................. 171 PROGRAM AE ....................... 64 R Recording time ........................ 17 Rec Review .............................. 39 Remaining battery time indicator ................................ 33 Remaining tape indicator ...... 33 Remote Commander ............ 242 Remote sensor ....................... 236 RESET ..................................... 216 S Self-diagnosis display .......... 217 Self-timer recording
.................................. 37, 51, 134 Signal convert function ........ 196 Skip scan .................................. 44 Slide show .............................. 166 Slow playback ......................... 44 SLOW SHUTTER .................... 61 SPOT FOCUS .......................... 71 STEADYSHOT ...................... 201 Stereo tape ............................. 221 STILL ........................................ 61 Sub sound .............................. 221 Super NightShot ..................... 35 S VIDEO jack
.................. 46, 86, 100, 137, 149 Q u i c k R e f e r e n c e T, U, V Tape counter ............................ 33 Tape PB ZOOM ....................... 77 Tape photo recording ............. 52 Telephoto ................................. 31 Time code ................................. 33 Title ................................. 110, 113 Title search ............................... 80 TRAIL ....................................... 61 Transition ................................. 27 TV color systems ................... 227 USB jack ................................. 180 USB streaming ....................... 177 W, X, Y, Z Warning indicators ............... 218 White balance .......................... 54 Wide-angle .............................. 31 Wide mode .............................. 55 WIPE ......................................... 57 Write-protect tab ............. 23, 117 Zero set memory ..................... 79 Zoom ........................................ 31 245 Printed on recycled paper. Printed using VOC (Volatile Organic Compound)-free vegetable oil based ink. Sony Corporation Printed in Japan
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2002-03-07 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2002-03-07
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Sony Corporation
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003739166
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
1-7-1 Konan Minato-ku
|
||||
1 |
1-7-1 Konan
|
|||||
1 |
Tokyo, N/A
|
|||||
1 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
j******@tuvam.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
AK8
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
DCRTRV50
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
R******** T******
|
||||
1 | Title |
Senior Manager
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-50********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-50********
|
||||
1 |
c******@jp.sony.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Sony Handycam DCR-TRV50 | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Kansai Electronic Industry Dev. Ct.
|
||||
1 | Name |
E******** H******
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-74********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-74********
|
||||
1 |
h******@kec.or.jp
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0000260 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC